Home

Agilent E4991A RF Impedance/Material Analyzer Service Manual

Contents

1. e4991ase028 Table 6 7 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0400 0010 2 1 ROUND GROMET 2 1400 1334 6 1 CABLE CLAMP 3 1400 0249 0 1 CABLE TIE 4 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 5 0363 0170 5 9cm RFIGASKET 6 1400 0611 0 4 CABLE CLAMP 7 E4991 01205 8 1 ANGLE 8 0950 2888 1 1 INVERTER BOARD 9 E4991 00606 1 1 CASE SHIELD 246 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts o gt Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 7 E Rear View 5 o Figure 6 8 Rear View y a el e o Q Q Q 0 o o O O O O ce o O ce O O O o O O Q O O o ae 9059 059 OKO fs
2. 4287ase06010 238 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 3 Top View Screw Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig o ps e 9 o e oO o en 6 2 i pan n 1 0515 1550 0 4 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 2 5041 9176 2 1 TRIM STRIP 3 0515 0889 6 5 SCREW MACH M3 5X 6 0515 0889 6 6 SCREW MACH M3 5X 6 Bottom Side 4 0515 0914 8 3 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 Chapter 6 239 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Top View Under Power Supply Figure 6 4 Top View Under Power Supply e4991ase025 240 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts o gt Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 7 E Table 6 4 Top View Under Power Supply D 5 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description 2 Desig S 1 1818 7321 8 2 DIMM64MB 1400 0249 0 10 CABLE TIE 2 04287 61631 0 1 WIR
3. wu gens I I I 99099 a oo oon m Wo gt s S YHT EU I B aul S irc usas ud EM ia 3 E mio pah I BELLE I ro x FETTET a a a a E x R ae TOOT TOTO oo me el PDA Ud E ae le gt u yar pu Hug EE EEEGEE TOTTI y 4287ase07002 Chapter 7 299 Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB A25 LAN Board Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 A24 GPIB A25 LAN Board Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 Tools Required e Torx screwdriver T15 Procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Step 2 Remove a torx screw fastening the board to the rear panel Step 3 Remove the board Figure 7 7 Assignment of the Bit switches on the A24 GPIB board 4287ase07006 300 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 CAUTION Figure 7 8 e4991ase104 Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB Card Replacement for serial prefix MY433 and later A24 GPIB Card Replacement for serial prefix MY433 and later Tools Required e Pozidriv scre
4. e4991ase091 258 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Table 6 16 Top View Major Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 04287 66531 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD 1818 6491 1 1 IC EEPROM 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 2 54810 66413 6 1 A26 DISPLAY BOARD 04287 87101 3 1 LABEL 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 3 04287 61009 8 1 A24 GPIB BOARD 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 4 04287 01210 5 3 SLOT COVER 0515 0430 3 3 SCREW M3 5 E4991 66505 7 1 A5 10MHz OVEN Assemble Opt 1D5 0515 0914 8 3 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 6 0960 2372 1 1 A20 ATX DIGITAL MOTHER BOARD 0515 1250 7 3 SCREW M3X0 5 7 See Table 6 28 1 A28 Floppy Disk Drive Assembly 0515 1550 0 4 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 8 See Table 6 29 1 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly 0515 1550 0 4 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 9 04287 61011 8 1 FAN ASSY 0515 1666 9 4 SCREW M4X35 POZI 10 See Table 6 14 1 A50 Power Supply Assembly 1 Included in the analog Interface board Chapter 6 259 o ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i m n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Top View Cables amp Other Parts Figure 6 16 Top View Cables amp
5. e4991ase093 262 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts o gt Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later 7 o S Table 6 18 Top View Screw D 5 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description 2 Desig S n 1 0515 1550 0 4 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 2 5041 9176 2 1 TRIM STRIP 3 0515 0889 6 5 SCREW MACH M3 5X 6 0515 0889 6 6 SCREW MACH M3 5X 6 Bottom Side 4 0515 0914 8 3 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 Chapter 6 263 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Top View Under Power Supply Figure 6 18 Top View Under Power Supply e4991ase094 264 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts o gt Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later 7 o S Table 6 19 Top View Under Power Supply b o Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description 2 Desig S n 1 04287 01213 8 1 COVER 0515 1550 0 1 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 0515 0914 8 3 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 2 E499 1 66510 1 ANALOG MOTHER 0515 1550 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 3 04287 61631 1 WIRE ASSY n O oc A 4 1400 1334 1 CLAMP CABLE 5 1400 0611 CLAMP CABLE O c 6 1400 1334 1 CLAMP CABLE 7 1400 3207 1
6. 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 12Q 9 42 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 8 mrad 9 43 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 31Q 6 81 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 6 84 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 91 Q 7 74 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 4 mrad 7 76 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 2 06 Q 7 01 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 7 02 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 74 Q 6 64 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 4 mrad 6 64 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 30 Q 8 87 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 90 Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 010Q 10 74 1 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 68 1 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 011 Q 10 84 10 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 03 Q 9 41 100 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 2 9 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 072 7 69 200 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q 7 35 300 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 31 Q 7 31 500 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 6 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 20 80 Q 6 52 600 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 5 1 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 450 6 29 1 0 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 19 0 7 61 1 3 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 12Q 10 07 1 6 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 11 0 mrad
7. mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D U pue 1991 soueuouad Z Test Head e4991ase005 12 Set the E4991A as follows Setting Operation Frequency 1GHz start stop Center 1 G n Power 1dBm Source Osc Unit Power Source Osc Level 1 Enter 13 Input the E4991A s frequency to the power meter 14 Press Trigger to make a measurement 15 Subtract theE4991 A s reading from the power meter reading then record it to the performance test record 16 Set the OSC level and Frequency settings as shown in Table 2 1 to test the analyzer and repeat step 12 to 15 for other points Chapter 2 33 Table 2 1 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Power Level Accuracy Test Settings OSC Level Center Frequency 1 dBm 1 GHz 0 dBm 3 GHz 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 10 dBm 300 MHz 20 dBm 50 MHz 25 dBm 1 GHz 30 dBm 10 MHz 35 dBm 2 GHz 40 dBm 100 MHz 34 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test This test verifies the E4991A s impedance measurement accuracy with a calibrated standards 16190B Specification Basic Accuracy 0 65 NOTE See the Specifications and Supp
8. A Test Head e4991ase009 gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Step 7 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant Chapter 3 137 Adjustment A4 AGC Gain Adjustment A4 AGC Gain Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the Gain of AGC on the A4 Receiver Board Required Equipment Nothing Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A4 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Make sure that nothing is connected to the E4991A Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant 138 Chapter 3 Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the local level in the A4 Receiver Board Required Equipment Nothing Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A4 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Make sure that nothing is connected to the E4991A Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Chapter 3 139 Adjustment A4 IF Gain Adjustment A4 IF Gain
9. e4991ase027 Table 6 8 Rear View Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 2950 0054 1 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 2190 0054 1 2 WSHR LK INTL T 2 04287 01205 8 1 REAR COVER I O 0515 0914 8 1 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 0515 1232 5 6 SCREW MACH M3 5 4 0515 1550 0 3 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 5 1250 0252 6 1 CONN RF BNC Opt 1D5 2190 0102 8 1 WSHR LK INTL T 2950 0035 8 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM Chapter 6 247 Figure 6 9 4287ase06008 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Side View Side View OS o OoO0595C 590595960 D eO LED Ca LECCE OO EE EE EX EX Ex gog0903050809090903000609090903050 OQ0D00620200000060600000000000630 IS o roo oooO aO CEO A03030Q0000006060023000000000060600 0000200606262900060606290900060000 od00000003080008000000080002080008 0908 OSO RO POSO ROO SOSA LORORO LOS 980808 0708080800080 SO O SOLOS RO 0905090909030509060002086809090909 OD0000000303000000030300000002000 2020202020202020 2020202020202009 0D6D60626000006060600060606062600 0900000000000606069 000000006000000 248 al JET _ Chapter6 Replace
10. Frequency Power Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Level Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 2540 10 13 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 17 6 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q t430 10 03 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 0 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 42 Q 5 22 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 0 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 22 Q 5 47 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 16 Q 4 96 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 6 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 61 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 O 5 12 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 800 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 12Q 5 02 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 230 5 50 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 72 Q 5 83 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 290 6 88 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 10 Q 14 69 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 14 3 mrad 8 87 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 0 9 24 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 12 8 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 64 Q 6 92 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 12 5 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 2 20 6 88 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 8 87 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 110 6 71 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 8 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty
11. e4991ase007 120 Chapter 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Adjustment Preparation for using the Adjustment Program E4991A Control Mode It is necessary to set the E4991A in addressable only mode to perform the adjustments When your E49914 is set to system controller mode set the E4991A in addressable only mode by the following E4991A mouse procedure Click System on the System menu Click GPIB Setup Menu box Select Addressable Only in the Control Mode box Turn the E4991A s main power off and then back on again Or set to addressable only mode by the following E4991A front panel procedure Press System key on the front panel Press Click key on the front panel Press Click key again if system controller mode is selected in the Control Mode box Turn the E4991 A s main power off and then back on again In addition you can confirm the E4991A GPIB address by the above procedure Chapter 3 121 gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Adjustment When performing more than one Adjustment perform them in the order they appear in this chapter The procedures are presented in the following order For example you need to perform the A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment A4 IF Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coef Adjustment and System Backup after performing the A3
12. Standard Airline with Short Termination Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation 1 MHz Z W CV105 mrad CV106 10 MHz Z W CV107 mrad CV108 100 MHz Z w CV109 mrad CV110 200 MHz Z W CVIII mrad CV112 300 MHz Z w CVI13 mrad CV114 500 MHz Z w CVIIS5 mrad CV116 600 MHz Z W CVI17 mrad CV118 1 0 GHz Z w CVII9 mrad CV120 1 3 GHz Z W CVI21 mrad CV122 1 6 GHz Z W CV123 mrad CV124 1 8 GHz Z W CVI25 mrad CV126 2 0 GHz Z W CVI27 mrad CV128 2 4 GHz Z W CV129 mrad CV130 2 6 GHz Z w CVI31 mrad CV132 2 8 GHz Z W CV133 Chapter 2 59 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation q mrad CV134 60 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Standard Open Averaging 8 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 1 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CVI 10MHz 3dBm Y mS a CV2 ds 100 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV3 T 200 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV4 S 5 300 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV5 S 9 500 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV6 z 2
13. a Q P 7 3 e4991ase4002 Table 6 12 Test Head for Option 010 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 60111 9 1 TEST HEAD 2 E4991 01210 5 1 ANGLE 3 04287 61651 4 1 EXTENSION CABLE ASSY 254 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Figure 6 13 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly o ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i n 4287ase06013 Table 6 13 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 65003 8 1 HDD INSTALLED 2 0515 0924 0 4 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 1410 1580 5 4 BUSHING 4 E5010 00655 6 4 PLATE 5 04287 01211 1 HDD BRACKET an 6 04287 01204 1 HDD HOLDER Chapter 6 255 Figure 6 14 4287ase06012 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Power Supply Assembly Power Supply Assembly Table 6 14 Power Supply Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0950 3396 8 1 PWR SPLY 225W 2 0515 0924 0 2 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 04287 60003 8 1 BRACKET P S ASSY 4 04287 61011 8 1 FAN ASSY 5 0515 1666 9 4 SCREW M4X35 POZI 6 1400 2198 2 2 SADDLE EDGE Other Parts 256 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Part
14. _lall olla lel EL BL I BL lol Idk s e4991ase024 234 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 1 Top View Major Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 04287 66521 7 1 A21 ANALOG INTERFACE BOARD 1818 6491 1 1 IC EEPROM 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 2 54810 66413 6 1 A26 DISPLAY BOARD 04287 87101 3 1 LABEL 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 3 1150 7769 2 1 A25 LAN BOARD 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 4 82341C 002 8 1 A24 GPIB BOARD 0515 0430 3 1 SCREW M3 5 E4991 66505 7 1 A5 10MHz OVEN Opt 1D5 0515 0914 8 3 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 6 04287 01210 5 2 SLOT COVER 0515 0430 3 2 SCREW M3 7 E4991 61020 1 1 A20 ATX DIGITAL MOTHER BOARD 0515 1250 7 6 SCREW M3X0 5 0380 1811 9 1 STAND OFF 8 0950 2782 4 1 A28 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 04287 01203 6 1 FDD HOLDER 0515 1056 1 3 SCREW 0515 1550 0 4 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 9 See Table 6 13 1 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly 0515 1550 0 4 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 10 04287 61011 8 1 FAN ASSY 0515 1666 9 4 SCREW M4X35 POZI 11 See Table 6 14 1 A50 Power Supply Assembly 12 E4991 61001 8 1 PORT USB 1400 0249 0 1 CABLE TIE 0515 1250 7 1 SCREW Chapter 6 235 D ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i m n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial p
15. e4991ase028 Table 6 22 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0400 0010 2 1 ROUND GROMET 2 1400 1334 6 1 CABLE CLAMP 3 1400 0249 0 1 CABLE TIE 4 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 5 0363 0170 5 9cm RFIGASKET 6 1400 0611 0 4 CABLE CLAMP 7 E4991 01205 8 1 ANGLE 8 0950 2888 1 1 INVERTER BOARD 9 E4991 00606 1 1 CASE SHIELD 270 Chapter 6 Figure 6 22 Rear View Rear View Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Ct o Q o E o d y H 2000 0398989 BOBO O o O O i e O 5 o G 06 O O Q T lt SEE 5 e4991ase095 Table 6 23 Rear View Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 1250 0252 6 1 CONN RF BNC Opt 1D5 2190 0102 8 1 WSHR LK INTL T 2950 0035 8 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 2 0515 15
16. Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 031 W w 0 002 W 276 7 mrad mrad 27 2 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 043 W w 0 005 w q 40 5 mrad mrad 4 4 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 16 W W 0 03 W 15 7 mrad mrad 2 5 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 37 W w 0 07w 16 5 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 60 W W 0 11W q 16 4 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm 1 62 W W 0 31 W 18 6 mrad mrad 3 5 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm 3 93 W W 0 77W 25 3 mrad mrad 5 0 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 2 39 W W 0 46W q 27 8 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 1 30 W W 0 19 W 58 9 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 1 12 W W 0 12 W 103 2 mrad mrad 10 9 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 2 10 W W 0 31 W q 57 3 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 7 04 W W 0 91 W 80 3 mrad mrad 10 4 mrad 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 14 55 W W 2 07 W 96 2 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 4 90 W W 0 74 W q 89 1 mrad mrad 13 4 mrad 98 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 8 GHz 3 dBm vA 2 66 W W 0 30W q 121 5 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad Chapter 2 99 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and F
17. Bias Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Level Uncertainty 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 87 mV 52 90 4 V 10 00 mV UV 685 uV 146 00 0 Y 6 00 mV UV 133 uV 454 70 4V 10 00 mV UV 455 uv 220 10 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 88 mV 52 80 50 mA 120 0 pA HA 89 HA 13 51 4mA 28 0 pA HA 12 HA 25 34 100 uA 20 2 pA uA 10 UA 21 67 100 pA 20 2 pA UA 1 2 HA 17 86 4 mA 28 0 HA pA 13 LA 22 42 50 mA 120 0 pA HA 89 LUA 13 57 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Agilent E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Service Manual Fifth Edition RTM A il Ti h I 1 vc gilent Technologies Manufacturing No E4991 90140 September 2008 Notices The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Agilent Technologies Microsoft MS DOS Windows Visual C Visual Basic VBA and Excel are registered UNIX is a registered trademark in U S and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Portions Copyright 1996 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Copyright 2001 2003 2004 2005 2008 Agilent Technologies Manual Printing History The manual s printing date and par
18. RF Extension Cable Caution Do not force the cable E4991A S SAR Connect test equipment here n n esr Test Head A si Bw Heat Resistant Cable m Test Head Stand l P d Caution Do not force the cable Test Fixture Stand eo Hn Avoid bending the cable Spacer e4991u opt00701 Step 3 Connect the test equipment to the 7 mm coaxial connector on the high temperature cable assembly in place of the DUT Port on the test head and perform the following tests See Figure 2 13 for the connector to which the test equipment a power sensor coaxial terminations or a 10 cm air line is connected e Power Level Accuracy Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test NOTE Record the test results using the performance test record for Option 007 Chapter 2 47 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test for Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit Performance Test for Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit Introduction This section provides the information on the performance test setups and procedures for the E4991A Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit To execute the performance tests for the Option 010 both the test head for Option 010 and the E4991A are required Required Test The E4991A with Option 010 requires the following performanc
19. Dual Banana to BNC f Adapter Multimeter E Test Head e4991ase013 44 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test 8 Set the multimeter to DCI function 9 Press Preset to preset the E4991A then set it as follows Setting Operation Osc Level 0 V 1 Source Osc Level 0 Enter DC Bias On Source DC Bias On Bias Source Current Source Bias Source Current Bias Limit 40 V Source Bias Limit 4 0 Enter Bias Level 50 mA _ Source Bias Level 5 0 k m mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n 1 OSC level is set to 5 mV automatically pue 1991 soueuwouad Z 10 Press Trigger Setup Single for a single sweep measurement 11 Record the multimeter reading on the performance test record 12 Set the Bias Level to test the analyzer as shown in Table 2 3 and repeat Step 10 to 11 for other test points Table 2 3 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Current Settings Bias Voltage Setting 50 mA 4 mA 100 mA 100 mA 4mA 50 mA Chapter 2 45 Step 1 Step 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test for Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit Performance Test for Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit I
20. Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 8 GHz 3 dBm vA 2 65 W W 0 30W q 120 6 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad Chapter 2 85 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 40 dBm Z 0 100 W w 0 010w 892 0 mrad mrad 68 1 mrad 10 MHz 40 dBm 0 110 W w 0 011 W q 104 2 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 100 MHz 40 dBm 0 23 W W 0 03 W 21 2 mrad mrad 2 9 mrad 200 MHz 40 dBm 0 42 W w 0 07w 18 7 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 300 MHz 40 dBm 0 66 W W 0 12W q 18 1 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 500 MHz 40 dBm 1 88 W W 0 31 W 21 6 mrad mrad 3 6 mrad 600 MHz 40 dBm 5 17 W W 0 80 w 33 2 mrad mrad 5 1 mrad 1 0 GHz 40 dBm 2 82 W W 0 45 W q 32 7 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 3 GHz 40 dBm 1 39 W W 0 19 W 63 2 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 1 6 GHz 40 dBm 1 20 W w 0 12 W 110 2 mrad mrad 11 0 mrad 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 2 24 W W 0 31 W q 61 1 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 2 0 GHz 40 dBm 7 48 W W 0 92 W 85 3 mrad mrad 10 4 mrad 2 4 GHz 40 dBm 15 72 W W 2 06 W 104 0 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad 2 6 GHz 40 dBm 5 12 W W 0 74 W q 93 1
21. Gin J Mu k m Enter key unit keys Cancel Close key key Chapter 2 By turning the knob clockwise or counterclockwise you can move the onscreen setting cursor If you press this knob with the cursor placed over a feature it is selected and executed Used to move the onscreen setting cursor up down left or right By pressing this key you can select and execute the feature that the cursor is placed over It has the same function as pressing the rotary knob Used to type numeric values one by one in the cursor position By pressing a unit key after entering a value the value and unit are set and executed When you press this key in an area where numeric values are typed the character to the left of the cursor is deleted If two or more characters are currently selected i e highlighted with the cursor pressing this key clears all of them If the numeric entry area contains no characters input and deletion of repeats each time you press this key By pressing one of these keys after entering a numeric value with the numeric keys the entry is set and executed with the prefix indicating unit of measurement added to the value Two unit prefixes are labeled on each key except Enter however the appropriate unit is determined automatically depending on the parameter being set If you press the key the entered value is executed without a unit prefix Used to close the setup toolbar at the right
22. HH 4 Test Head 146 Chapter3 Adjustment A2 DC Bias Output Resistor Conductance Adjustment Opt 001 only Figure 3 21 A2 DC Bias Output R C Adjustment Setup 2 2 E4991A nm C Oo 1 J cj 7 4 Test Head e4991ase020 Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant gt 2 s z e E D 5 3 Chapter 3 147 Figure 3 22 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Adjustment Writing the Instrument ID Writing the Instrument ID The E4991A has an instrument ID such as a serial number and an option number in the EEPROM When the option configuration is changed or the EEPROM on the A21 Analog Interface Board is replaced it is necessary to re write the instrument ID using the Write ID in the Adjustment Program Required Equipment Nothing Procedure Run the adjustment program Choose Write ID in the Main Menu Make sure that nothing is connected to the E4991A Follow the adjustment program instruction to
23. Q en ea D U 2 e mM 2 ae e Auto Configuration With Fail Safe Settings This option is unnecessary to use in the E4991A Save Settings and Exit If you want to quit from BIOS setup utility without saving select a Exit Without Saving For details refer to Exit Without Saving on page 209 Exit Without Saving If you want to quit from BIOS setup utility with saving select a Save Setting and Exit For details refer to Save Settings and Exit on page 209 Chapter 4 201 Figure 4 36 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Standard CMOS Setup Standard Setup options are displayed by choosing Standard CMOS Setup using gt 1 keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 36 is displayed If date or time is incorrect change it using gt fl keys PageUp key and PageDown key If you want to exit from this page and go to main menu hit ESC key STANDARD CMOS SETUP Page AMIBIOS SETUP STANDARD CMOS SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Date mm dd yyyy Fri 88 2881 Base Memory 646 KB Time hh mm ss 4 52 36 Extd Memory 127 MB Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB 3 Floppy Drive B Not Installed LBA Blk PIO 32Bit Type Size Cyln Head WPcom Sec Mode Mode Mode Mode Pri Master Auto off Pri Slave Not Installed Sec Master Not Installed Sec S
24. Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting To check the Mouse Procedure Connect the mouse to the E4991A rear Turn the E4991A on Move the mouse and press the mouse buttons and make sure that the mouse pointer moves smoothly and the mouse buttons work correctly If any fail to work there is a possibility that the mouse or the A20 Digital Motherboard gives problem To check the FDD Procedure Inset the floppy disk into the E4991A FDD Click the followings Then Save As dialog box is displayed Save Recall SAVE STATE Select the drive and file name as follows Drive a File name e499la Then click OK If any fail to work there is a possibility that the floppy disk the A28 FDD or the flat cables between the FDD and the A20 Digital Motherboard via the A26 Display board gives problem Next click the followings to recall the state file you saved Then Open dialog box is displayed Save Recall RECALL STATE Select the drive and file name as follows Drive a File name e499la Then click OK If any fail to work there is a possibility that the floppy disk the A28 FDD or cable between the FDD and the A20 Digital Motherboard gives problem To check the VGA Display Output Procedure Connect the external monitor to the E4991A rear Turn the external monitor on Make sure that the
25. oo o mn 2 e pur e 2 D U pue 1991 soueuouad Z A Test Head e4991ase001 2 Press Preset to preset the E4991A 3 Set the E4991A as follows Setting Operation Frequency IMHz start stop Center 1 M u Power 0dBm Source Osc Unit Power Source Osc Level 0 Enter 4 Press Stop Single on the 53181A front panel to make a single measurement 5 Subtract the analyzer setting l MHz from the frequency counter reading and record the result on the performance test record 6 Disconnect the BNC connector from 1 ch in the 53181A front panel then connect it to the 2 ch as shown in Figure 2 2 Chapter 2 29 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Figure 2 2 Frequency Accuracy Test Setup 2 N m BNC f Adapter 7mm N f X Adapter E4991A Frequency Counter o Ss EJ O LE EJ EJ BNC m BNC m Cable A Test Head e4991ase002 7 Setthe E4991A s frequency to 3GHz by the following procedure
26. 13 dBm 10 dB 22 9 dBm 18 dBm 15 dB 27 9 dBm 23 dBm 20 dB 32 9 dBm 28 dBm 25 dB 37 9 dBm 33 dBm 30 dB 40 dBm 38 dBm 35 dB The A3 VCO signal is also mixed with RF1 signal which is supplied to A4 receiver board A4 Receiver Board AA receiver board receives the Vch and Ich signals from the A6 test head through PORT 1 and PORT2 mixes down them into 12 5 KHz IF signals and converts the analog signals to digital data The receiver has two signal flow to measure Vch and Ich signals The input attenuators on A4 board are controlled to optimize the receiver input signal levels the signal to noise ratios for accurate measurements These attenuators are set depending on the output power setting as shown in Table 5 4 228 Chapter5 Theory of Operation Analog Section Table 5 4 Input Attenuator Nominal Setting of Input Attenuator on Output Power Level A4 12 9 dBm 1 dBm 20 dB 22 9 dBm 13 dBm 10 dB 40 dBm 23 dBm 0 dB The variable gain IF amplifiers automatically control the IF signal levels to be within appropriate range for the input of the ADC analog to digital converter The digitized data at ADC is transferred through A10 analog motherboard to the DSP on A2 analog interface board which performs vector component extraction and calculation for the Vch and Ich signal data A6 Test Head Board for the standard and Option 010 A6 test head receives the stimulus signa
27. 2 Chapter 4 163 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Figure 4 9 C System Configuration RhiBlOS System Configuration C 1985 1997 nr Lopa Bunga t redy Lag Main Procasaw 7 Meth Processer Bilt la Floppy Brive A 1 44 WB JE Searching for Boot Record from IBE 8 0K Step 4 Searching for Boot Record A message of Searching for Boot Record from IDE 0 OK shown in Figure 4 9 is displayed after system configuration is displayed when the E4991 A starts to boot from the A27 Mass Storage IDE 0 without problem However a message of Drive Not Ready shown in Figure 4 10 is displayed when the E499 1 A could not boot from it In this case the E4991 A may have a problem around the A27 Figure 4 10 D message of Hard Disk not ready AMIBIOS System Conf igur 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Main Processor AMD K6 2 488 Base Memory Size Math Processor Built In Ext Memory Size Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB 3 Display Type Floppy Drive B None Serial Port s AMIBIOS Date 07 15 95 Parallel Port s External Cache 512KB Disabled Power Management PCI Devices PCI Onboard Bridge Device PCI Onboard USB Controller IRQ9 PCI Onboard IDE PCI Slot 1 Ethernet IRQ18 PCI Slot 2 VGA PCI Slot 3 Unknown Device IRQ11 Searching for Boot Record from Floppy Drive Not Ready Insert BOOT diskette in A Press any key when ready
28. Fi ESC Advanced Menu The Advanced Menu shown below is displayed by choosing Advanced using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Select Advanced Chipset Control using keys The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 48 If Video Boot Type is incorrect select it using keys and change the setting by pressing keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press s key Advanced Menu Seup Waning Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction Advanced Version Information Advanced Boot Options Advanced HOD Options Advanced Chipset control Advanced OS Options System Monitoring Cache Control PC Configuration VO Device Configuration F1 Help f Select tem E Change Values F9 Setup Defaults ESC Ext Select Menu Enter Select gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit Pl gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 214 Chapter 4 Figure 4 48 Figure 4 49 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later Advanced Chipset Control Sub menu PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility Advanced Chipset Control Item Specific Help Video boot type Disable Onboard video Primary Video PCI PCI VGA Adapter Priority First Graphics Aperture 64ME Enable Memory Gap Disable d AGST Audio Enable d Embedded USE De vice Enable d Embedd
29. None Serial Port s 3F8 2F8 AMIBIOS Date 07 15 95 Parallel Port s 378 Power Management APM SMI ATA PI Device s Type Size LBA 32Bit Block PIO Mode Mode Mode Mode Primary Master Hard Disk 8064MB LBA Off 16Sec 4 PCI Devices PCI Onboard Bridge Device PCI Onboard USB Controller IRQ9 PCI Onboard IDE PCI Slot 1 Ethernet IRQ10 PCI Slot 2 VGA PCI Slot 3 Unknown Device IRQ11 Searching for Boot Record from Floppy OK e4991ase070 Figure B 3 System Recovery Start Screen Product E4991A system recovery disk Rev 1 00 Copyright C 2001 Agilent Technologies Inc All right reserved This program will recover the C drive of this instruments factory shipment state Please refer Operating Manual Continue Y NT e4991ase067 Step 5 Press Y key on keyboard in the following case Continue Y N Y Step 6 Remove the system recovery disk from the floppy disk drive after confirming the following display Please reset E4991 A 316 Appendix B Step 7 Step 8 NOTE NOTE System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 AS A gt is indicated on the screen when the system recovery is complete Shut down the E4991A by pressing the power switch The E4991A will restart in the system recovery complete condition System recovery can be suspended without execution by pressing N instead of Y Step 5 A g
30. e E m 9 e a lt E S E S E 8 P E E S amp S E O 3 3 3 Q Q Q G gt 4 4 4 E E a a a E e e e bl Tt Tt 9 N 2 z 2 2 z E Z Z Z E Al Adjustmen gt _ gt gt eS RS eS d A3 Adjustmen gt _ gt _ gt gt _ gt A4 Adjustmen _ gt _ gt _ gt A2 Adjustment Opt 001 _ gt ka AS Adjustment Opt 1D5 Default Cal Adjustment i Chapter 3 123 Adjustment Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly If you replace the following assembly the adjustment items as shown in Table 3 2 are required Then perform the corresponding adjustment using the Spot Adjustment in the Adjustment Program Table 3 2 Required Adjustment Item after Replacing Assembly Replaced Assembly Required Adjustment Spot Adjustment in Adjustment Program T E E e 2 E E E E E o o o o o E E E E E 3 3 3 3 3 v lt lt lt lt lt en N N lt lt lt lt lt Al REFERENCE OSCILLATOR A3 SOURCE 1 A4 RECEIVER A6 STANDARD TEST HEAD A2 DC Bias Opt 001 AS 10MHz OVEN Opt 1D5 If your instrument has an option 001 A2 DC Bias also perform A2 Adjustment 124 Chapter 3 NOTE Adjustment Adjustment Program Adjustment Program This section describes the explanation of the function and the procedure of the Adjustment Program For detail
31. o D 7 y je o e 3 Q Chapter 4 169 Figure 4 16 NOTE NOTE Step 3 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY433 and later Windows boot screens Built en NT Technology e5061ase051 If you encounter the following problems try to reinstall the operating system before replacing the A27 xxx file is missing is displayed on DOS screen The Window boot screen is not displayed after the splash screen is displayed Windows always boots up with Safe Mode If the E4991A was turned off without shutdown process Microsoft Scandisk runs while the windows boot screens are displayed If a serious problem is found in the scandisk reinstall the operating system For details of the operating system installation refer to Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage on page 313 If the operating system still doesn t boot up properly after reinstallation replace the A27 The operating system automatically checks the device drivers which are necessary to use the E4991A functions and are installed in the system before the E4991A is shipped from Agilent factory If the operating system doesn t detect them a message box is displayed In this case install the device driver Measurement view The measurement view as shown in Figure 4 17 is displayed after the system initialization is completed without problem 170 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Booting Proces
32. 164 Chapter 4 Figure 4 11 Step 5 NOTE Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 You can check whether the A27 gives hardware problem or not using BIOS setup utility as shown in Figure 4 11 For details of how to run the BIOS setup utility refer to Run the BIOS setup utility on page 200 Move the cursor to Auto Detect Hard Disks using gt 1 keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 11 is displayed Auto Detect Hard Disks page AMIBIOS SETUP STANDARD CHOS SETUP C 1998 finerican Megatrends Inc fill Rights Reserved Date mm dd yyyy Med TN 24 2881 Time hh nm ss 18 14 48 Floppy Drive fi MB 1 44 E 1 Floppy Drive B Not Installed Type Size Cyln Head HPcom Pri Master Auto 5729 12416 15 8 5 Pri Slave Not Installed Sec Master Not Installed Sec Slave Not Installed Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled Month Jan Bec Day 81 31 Year 1981 2899 The E4991 A has an A27 hard disk drive which is connected to the IDE1 connector on the A20 Digital Motherboard The disk size cyln and so on are displayed as shown in the Figure 4 11 as soon as the mass storage is detected If the mass storage is not detected Not Installed is displayed on Pri Master right In this case check the flat cables first which are connected with the A27 and the A20 via the A26 Display board If the fla
33. 39 E E E DUT Port is D OPTO10 B a Test Head o o Gl E gt Extension Cable Supplied with Agilent E4991A Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit e4991ase4001 Chapter 2 49 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test for Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit 50 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Function Test Function Test Introduction This section provides the test procedures used to verify that the E4991A s performance characteristics are met The function tests is recommended to be performed with the E4991A performance test Warm Up Time Allow the E4991A to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the performance tests mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Ambient Conditions Perform all function tests in ambient conditions of 23 C 5 C 70 RH Chapter 2 51 Performance Test and Function Test Function Test Low Loss Capacitor Check This test verifies the Low Loss Capacitor included in the 16195B Calibration Kit which is furnished accessory for E4991A NOTE Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Network Analyzer 8753ES Opt 006 8753ET Opt 006 or 8753E Opt 006 7mm Calibration KIT 85031B Procedure 1 Press Preset to preset the network analyzer 2 Setup the network analyzer as follows Parameter Setting Operation Conversion Z reflection
34. 50 mA 120 0 mA mA 8 9 mA S 8 4 mA 28 0 mA mA 1 2 mA 100 mA 20 2 mA mA 1 0 mA 2 100 mA 20 2 mA mA 1 2mA 4 mA 28 0 mA mA 1 3mA 50 mA 120 0 mA mA 89 mA Chapter 2 115 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Function Test Record Agilent Technologies E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Mainframe Serial No Test Date Test Head Serial No Temperature C Calibration Kit Serial No Humidity R H Tested by Low Loss Capacitor Test Pass Fail 116 Chapter 2 gt 2 s z e E D 5 3 Adjustment This chapter provides the adjustment procedure for the E4991 A RF Impedance Material Analyzer to ensure that the E4991A is within its specifications 117 WARNING NOTE Adjustment Safety Considerations Safety Considerations This manual contains NOTES CAUTIONs and WARNINGs that must be followed to ensure the safety of the operator and to keep the instrument in a safe and serviceable condition The Adjustment must be performed by qualified service personnel Any interruption of the protective ground conductor inside or outside the equipment or disconnection of the protective ground terminal can make the can make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption of the protective ground system for any reason is prohibited Warm up for Adjustment Allow the E4991A to warm up for at least 30 min
35. 90 114 30 140 14 70 Messages No fixed delta marker SYST ERR command has been sent by GPIB When the equipment finds no occurrence of an error a message is returned as error number 0 No fixed delta marker Because the reference marker is not set to fixed D mode the sent command has been ignored For example when the fixed D mode is not set the CALC 1 5 MARK REF Y command has been attempted in order to set the reference marker to the designated measurement values First use the CALC 1 5 MARK REF command to display the reference marker Next use the CALC 1 5 MARK REF TYPE command to change the setting to fixed D mode No marker delta parameter not set This occurs when the reference marker s D mode is Off and the CALC 1 5 MARK SET command or CALC 1 5 MARK FUNC DOM SPAN command has been attempted in order to set the D value to span value within the sweep range or within the partial search range First use the CALC 1 5 MARK REF command to display the reference marker Next use the CALC 1 5 MARK REF TYPE command to set the D Mode or Fixed D Mode to On No memory trace displayed Due to the fact that memory trace 1s not displayed a command that has been sent was ignored For example when the memory trace is not displayed the DISP TRAC 1 5 Y FOR command is attempted in order to set the scale setting subject as the data trace First use the CALC 1 5 MATH FUNC command to display the memory trace No Vali
36. A50 Power Supply Removal A51 LCD Removal A52 Inverter Board Removal Torx screwdriver Flat edge screwdriver TIS small A20 Digital Motherboard Removal A24 GPIB A25 LAN Board Removal A26 Display Board Removal A28 FDD Removal EEPROM Removal Front Panel Removal CPU Replacement Open end wrench 5 16 inch A1 A2 A3 A4 Board Removal Open end torque wrench PLCC extractor 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib A1 A2 A3 A4 Board Removal EEPROM Removal Soldering Iron A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal Chapter 7 285 N Az D o D O O 3 O T T O je o p o Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 NOTE Step 8 Step 9 Replacement Procedure Outer Cover Removal Outer Cover Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium Procedure Disconnect the power cable from the E4991A Remove the four rear feet Remove the six screws holding the outer cover from the rear side Remove the side strap handles Turn the E4991A over Remove eight screws from the bottom side Remove four bottom feet If bottom feet is not be removed outer cover won t be removed smooth Put a plastic cover p n 5040 6973 on the front panel of the E4991A and place the E4991A on flat table with its front panel down Slide up the outer cover and remove it carefully 286 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure Front Panel
37. Chapter 6 281 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Other Parts Table 6 31 Other Parts Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description E4991 900x0 4 1 OPERATION MANUAL E4991 900x2 6 1 PROGRAMMING MANUAL E4991 901x0 9 l SERVICE MANUAL E4991 180x0 0 1 SAMPLE PROGRAM SET E4991 900x1 5 1 QUICK START GUIDE E4991 905x0 9 1 CD ROM manual E4991 16000 2 1 RECOVERY FD 1 00 E4991 16101 4 1 CD ROM SOFTWARE 1 00 1150 7846 6 MOUSE PS 2 1150 7970 7 1 KEYBOARD 8710 1766 2 1 TORQUE WRENCH E4991 60021 0 1 SHORT TERMINATION E4991 60022 1 1 OPEN TERMINATION 04287 60021 0 1 50 OHM TERMINATION 2 04287 60022 1 l LOW LOSS CAPACITOR 16195 60041 8 l CARRYING CASE 16195 90030 8 l OPERATION NOTE 16195B 7 1 Opt OBW only 2 Included in 16195B Calibration Kit 282 Chapter6 N Az D o D O O 3 O T T O je o p o Replacement Procedure This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer 283 Replacement Procedure Replacing an Assembly Replacing an Assembly The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in a E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshooting 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the fa
38. I6Mod i 9 qeo CX A peeH e qeo Bal nur lt A pg 13413094 py S l A g euy pes sal gy 31qe9 peog pesy ZHINOL m 18U 0IN Je g Boreuy BN OLY phar Eee PESO ZJM 148 ZHINOL I z gt i indmo Joy Jul I jnau Jes Kg RR SSK Pehy sng euy sa uondo j 9 0 PH Wino iex cv L00 uondo pa seig od zv sng euy sng Bojeuy Jexyeeds pieoqAsy 10014 ZZY 9 qeo Pld 99110 i I I I L I O FE comm pleog NS M mJ uos I sil oleuy Lzy JoMOd NEA JUGIH I ued c8 uow ue Alquiassy ccv AZL uen 9EH U UOJ ues 1a owe AA A AS NEL J9M0d 5 Theory of Operation N N cL09se 66ra XLV d07 LSY JuBipioeg 404 Jeienu Zay ACL ada ecv pJeog Aeidsiq 9cv CGH EV E YA JaujoW 21610 ocv I I I p1eog J l 19d NV1 Sev NY I I I I I I I eo vs pieog gldO rcv ao preog lod l ZINOO VINOO SHOd jeues Hoddng oN I I I lossy I UO 1emod esnojy pjeoq ey z Sd U HO 19816 al d1 Hod Jejered i Jojoeuuoo GZY Ses mash l JBG 3x3 i 19018 eibi WEe IDeIg 190 18 WSJSAS Vi66t3 IUSIIDY Chapter 5 Theory of Operation Overall Instrument Operation System Block Diagram for serial prefix MY433 and later Figure 5 3 jddns Jamod B
39. Order of Adjustment AAA Order of Adjustment Local Level Adjustment Figure 3 2 Order of Adjustment A1 VCXO Frequency Adjustment A3 Local Level Adjustment A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment e4991ase015 122 A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 IF Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coef Adjustment System Backup Independent Adjustments A2 DC Bias Adjustment Opt 001 AS Ref Oven Adjustment Opt 1D5 Chapter 3 Adjustment Order of Adjustment Figure 3 3 Order of DC Bias Adjustment A2 DC Bias Adjustment Prosedure A2 DC Bias Volt Adjustment A2 DC Bias Crnt Adjustment A2 DC Bias RC Adjustment System Backup e4991ase022 The Spot Adjustment in the Adjustment Program can perform the following adjustments automatically according to Order of Adjustment as shown in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Required Adjustment Items in the Spot Adjustment Spot Adjustment in the Adjustment Items gt Adjustment Program a m et am m s 8 3 S d z S e S Z T E S g 3 M in amp 2 E E P E 5 S 9 8B E 3 E E 2 E E E E B E S z T E 3 2 E 2 8 a y 4 3 8 2 lt E lt E 3 El o gt E gt a s E lt z 5 E lt lt E E E amp 3 G 3 E 3 E 3 5 Zz lt E S El S lt 5 z lt 3 8 E z Q 9 i o 5 Q 2 E 2 Q E z C gt O 2 2 en lt m Ie
40. Removable Devices CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN ltem Specific Help Keys used to view or configure devices lt Enter gt expands or collapses devices with ator Ctrl Enter expands all lt Shitt 1 gt enables or indicates disabled device disables a device lt gt and lt gt moves the device up or down Change Supervisor Password A password needs to be entered to execute the BIOS setup utility If a password has not been assigned in the E4991A set the password using this BIOS setup utility as follows a Select Security using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key b Select Set Supervisor password using keys and press key c Enter the password of e4991la Never set another password d Press key e Ifa message of New supervisor password installed Press any key to continue is displayed press key Power Menu The Power Menu shown below is displayed by choosing Power using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 51 If After Power Failure is incorrect select it using keys and change the setting by pressing keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press s key 216 Chapter4 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later Figure 4 51 Power Menu PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility
41. Welcome to the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard e5070bqj001 Appendix B 329 2 fo N z Nn n CD Y pen y Q O JO uonej ejsu ueis S g System Installation for A27 Mass Storage Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later Step 3 In the Windows 2000 Professional Setup dialog box select the accept this agreement box and click the Next gt button Figure B 5 Then the Windows 2000 operating system is restarted automatically Figure B 5 Windows 2000 Professional Setup dialog box 2000 Professional Setup License Agreement Do you accept the terms of the License Agreement for Windows 2000 P 4f Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement To continue with Setup you must accept the agreement f rr rorrrprrrrrrrrrrrmrrs Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Licensed Copies AAA END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT AAA IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement accept this agreement don t accept this agreement Back Next e5070bqj004 Step 4 The Network Identification wizard appears Click the Next gt button Figure B 6 Figure B 6 Network Identification wizard Windows 2000 Professional Setup License Agreement Do you accept the terms of the License Agreement for Windows 2000 P 4 Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the
42. o ps e to e oO o en 6 2 o n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit Figure 6 11 Replaceable Parts of the Option 007 Test Kit e4991u opt00703 252 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 11 Replaceable Pats of the Option 007 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 61610 5 1 CABLE ASSY HEAT RESISTANT 2 E4991 01220 7 1 HOLDER CABLE 3 E4991 01221 8 1 HOLDER CABLE 4 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3X8 TORX T10 PAN 5 0515 1946 8 4 SCREW MACH M3X6 TORX T10 90 DEG FLAT 6 E4991 60005 0 1 STAND TEST FIXTURE 7 04287 61651 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY EXTENSION 8 E4991 60006 1 1 STAND TEST HEAD 9 E4991 60032 3 1 TERMINATION OPEN 10 E4991 60031 2 1 TERMINATION SHORT 11 E4991 60060 7 1 CASE TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION SET 12 1250 2879 7 3 ADAPTER N M SMA F 13 1250 3157 6 3 ADAPTER N F SMA F 14 04291 09001 4 1 PAD 15 E4991 18001 7 1 DISK FLOPPY TEMP CHARAC TEST SOFTWARE 16 1400 0584 6 3 TIE CABLE Chapter 6 253 D ps e 9 o e oO o en 6 2 o m n Figure 6 12 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Test Head for Option 010 Test Head for Option 010 J EEE
43. start stop Center 3 G n 8 Press Stop Single on the 53181A front panel to make a single measurement 9 Subtract the analyzer setting 3 GHz from the frequency counter reading and record the result on the performance test record 30 Chapter 2 Power Level Accuracy Test Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test This test verifies the E4991A s test signal power level accuracy with a power meter and a power sensor Specification Power Level Accuracy 2 dB 1 GHz 2 dB 4 dB 1 GHz with Opt 007 Required Equipment Description Power Meter 5 5 dB 1 GHz with Opt 010 3 dB gt 1 GHz 43 dB 6 dB gt 1 GHz with Opt 007 7 6 dB 1 GHz with Opt 010 Recommended Model E4418A B E4419A B or 438A Power Sensor E4412A E9304A or 8482A 8481D Multimeter 3458A BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 N m BNC f Adapter p n 1250 0780 7mm N f Adapter 11524A Dual Banana BNC f Adapter p n 1251 2277 Feed Through Termination 11048C Procedure 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 3 Refer to Page 42 for the test setup applied to Option 007 and Page 44 for Option 010 Chapter 2 T en 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z 31 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Figure 2 3 Power Level Accuracy Test Setup 1 N m BNC f Adap
44. 1 MHz 20 dBm Z 19 2 kW kw 969 W 883 1 mrad mrad 61 5 mrad 10 MHz 20 dBm 212 7 W W 10 5 w q 97 5 mrad mrad 3 4 mrad 100 MHz 20 dBm 4 13 W W 0 42W 19 2 mrad mrad 2 0 mrad 200 MHz 20 dBm 1 8W W 0 23 W 17 7 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 20 dBm 1 08 W W 0 17W q 17 8 mrad mrad 2 6 mrad 500 MHz 20 dBm 0 59 W W 0 09 W 26 2 mrad mrad 3 8 mrad 600 MHz 20 dBm 0 49 W W 0 09 w 50 6 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 800 MHz 20 dBm 0 65 W W 0 12W q 48 1 mrad mrad 8 8 mrad 1 0 GHz 20 dBm 1 37 W W 0 23 W 31 0 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 6 GHz 20 dBm 4 48 W W 0 72 W 52 3 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 1 8 GHz 20 dBm 2 04 W W 0 29 W q 61 5 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 2 0 GHz 20 dBm 1 39 W W 0 10 W 220 8 mrad mrad 14 3 mrad 2 2 GHz 20 dBm 2 11 W W 0 23 W 122 0 mrad mrad 12 8 mrad 2 4 GHz 20 dBm 4 51 W W 0 64 W q 89 2 mrad mrad 12 6 mrad 96 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 6 GHz 20 dBm z 15 6W W 22W q 104 1 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 3 0 GHz 20 dBm z 7 1W W 11W q 96 3 mrad mrad 13 9 mrad Chapter 2 97 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record
45. 13 0 mrad mrad 2 0 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm 1 47 W W 0 22 W 14 5 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 94 W W 0 16 W q 15 5 mrad mrad 2 6 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 53 W W 0 09 W 23 8 mrad mrad 3 8 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 45 W W 0 09 w 46 3 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 61 W W 0 12W q 44 8 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 1 28 W W 023W 28 9 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 4 24 W W 0 72W 49 4 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 1 97 W W 0 29w q 59 4 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 1 35 W W 0 10 W 214 3 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 2 06 W W 0 23 W 119 2 mrad mrad 12 8 mrad 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 4 40 W W 0 64 W q 87 0 mrad mrad 12 6 mrad 94 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 6 GHz 3 dBm vA 14 9 W W 2 2W q 99 7 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 3 0 GHz 3 dBm ya 6 9 W W LIW q 93 7 mrad mrad 13 9 mrad Chapter 2 95 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty
46. 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV127 mrad a CV128 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV129 mrad a CV130 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV131 q mrad a CV132 Chapter 2 69 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 2 8 GHz 3 dBm z W a CV133 q mrad a CV134 70 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Airline with Short Averaging 1 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 1 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CV105 mrad a CV106 10 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CV107 y RE mrad a CV108 2 3 100 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CV109 SA mrad a CV110 2 z 200 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CV111 v mrad a CV112 300 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CV113 mrad a CV114 500 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CVII5 mrad a CV116 600 MHz 40 dBm Z W a CV117 mrad a CV118 1 0 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV119 mrad a CV120 1 3 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV121 mrad a CV122 1 6 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV123 mrad a CV124 1 8 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV125 mrad a CV126 2 0 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV127 mrad a CV128 2 4 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV129 mrad a CV130 2 6 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV131 q mrad a CV132 Chapter 2 71 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Freq P
47. 2F8 378 Power Management APM SMI ATA PI Device s Type Size LBA 32Bit Block PIO Mode Mode Mode Mode Primary Master Hard Disk 8064MB LBA Off 16Sec 4 PCI Devices PCI Onboard Bridge Device PCI Onboard USB Controller IRQ9 PCI Onboard IDE PCI Slot 1 Ethernet IRQ10 PCI Slot 2 VGA PCI Slot 3 Unknown Device IRQ11 Searching for Boot Record from Floppy OK e4991ase070 150 Chapter 3 Figure 3 25 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Step 7 Step 8 NOTE Adjustment System Backup for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 System Backup Start Screen Product E4991A System Backup Disk Rev 1 00 Copyright C 2001 Agilent Technologies Inc All right reserved Continue Y N e4991ase068 Press Y key on keyboard in the following case Continue Y N Y A Backup file is already exist Overwrite Y N Y gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Remove the system backup disk from the floppy disk drive after confirming the following display DONE A A gt is indicated on the screen when the system backup is complete You can confirm if the system backup is complete by the following procedure ANC C gt dir a Then confirm the file size and the time stamp of the following two files 1 drvspace 000 2 sysbak dat the same file size and the time stamp is the present Shut down the E4991A by pressing the power switch The E4991A will restart in the system back
48. 30 dBm 10 MHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 35 dBm 2 GHz 6 00 3 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 40 dBm 100 MHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 27 dB Chapter 2 89 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Option 007 Standard Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm 12 13 mS mS 0 38 mS 10 MHz 3 dBm Y 13 31 mS mS 0 80 mS 100 MHz 3 dBm Y 25 2 mS mS 3 4mS 200 MHz 3 dBm Y 40 0 mS mS 6 6 mS 300 MHz 3 dBm Y 54 1 mS mS 9 8 mS 500 MHz 3 dBm Y 82 mS mS 17 mS 600 MHz 3 dBm Y 102 mS mS 21 mS 800 MHz 3 dBm Y 134 mS mS 28 mS 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 168 mS mS 35 mS 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y 291 mS mS 46 mS 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y 369 mS mS 61 mS 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y 427 mS mS 70 mS 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 697 mS mS 126 mS 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y 789 mS mS 140 mS 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y 890 mS mS 156 mS 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y 999 mS mS 171 mS 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y 1121 mS mS 186 mS 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 1254 mS mS 205 mS 90 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 30 5 mW mW 3 1 mW 10 MHz 3 dBm Z 35
49. 600 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV7 a 800 MHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV8 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV9 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV10 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV11 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV12 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV13 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV14 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV15 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV16 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV17 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y mS a CV18 Chapter 2 61 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Short Averaging 8 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 1 MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV19 10 MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV20 100 MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV21 200 MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV22 300MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV23 500MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV24 600 MHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV25 800 MHz 3 dBm Z mw a CV26 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV27 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV28 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV29 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV30 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV31 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV32 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV33 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV34 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV35 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mW a CV36 62 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard 50W Averaging 8 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter al E
50. Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B 50 ohm Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the Source Test Connect the Test Head to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 2 Source on External Test dialog box Connect the 50ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK amp Next gt gt to go to the next test 190 Chapter 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting Out ATT Test This test is to check if the Output Attenuator on A3 Board is changed normally Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B 50 ohm Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the Out ATT Test Connect the Test Head to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 3 Out ATT on External Test dialog box Connect the 500hm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK amp Next to go to the next test Input ATT Test This test is to check if the Input Attenuator on A4 Board is changed normally Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B 50 ohm Proced
51. Ifthe LED doesn t light problem seems in the CPU DIMM memory or A20 Digital Motherboard LED of the Num Lock key Make sure of the followings before replacing the CPU DIMM64MB or A20 Whether CPU DIMM64MB and BIOS ROM on the A20 are connection good or not e Whether the jumpers setting on the A20 are correct or not as described in Configure the Motherboard on page 198 Whether BIOS options are correct or not as described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 200 Checking with the external monitor Connect an additional VGA monitor to the VIDEO output on the E4991A rear panel Ifsomething is displayed on the external monitor problem is around the LCD Ifnothing is displayed even on the external monitor problem seems in A26 Display board or around the A20 Digital Motherboard Check Flat Cable Check a flat cable between A51 LCD and A26 display board Check around the Back Light Check A52 inverter board and cable between A52 and A26 and cables between A51 LCD and A52 160 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Figure 4 6 Booting Process Power Switch On A VIDEO BIOS Title Screen B BIOS Logo and RAM Counting DEL Key Pressed No I BIOS Setup Menu System Configuration Display C D Searching for Boot Record from IDE O E E4991A Logo
52. Meas CONVERSION Z refl Format Liner Format LIN MAG Source Power 0 dBm Power 0 1 Start Frequency 5 GHz Start 5 G n Stop Frequency 6 GHz Stop 6 G n IF BW 100 Hz Avg IF BW 1 0 0 1 Number of points 401 or larger Sweep Setup NUMBER of POINTS 4 0 TH 3 Perform the S11 1 port full calibration 4 Connect the low loss capacitor to the port 1 5 Make a single sweep measurement 6 Record the minimum impedance value and its frequency to calculation sheet 7 Record the test result to the function test record If the minimum impedance or the frequency is out of limit check the fail column 52 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Calculating Sheet Performance Test Power Level Accuracy Test N Power Level Frequency Multimeter Reading Test Result y a 16 99 20 log1ga T e 33 e 15 dBm 1 MHz mV dBm 53 50 at Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test D o 16190B Calibration Value amp Standard Open Termination Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation 1 MHz Y mS CVI 10 MHz Y mS CV2 100 MHz Y mS CV3 200 MHz Y mS CV4 300 MHz Y mS CV5 500 MHz Y mS CV6 600 MHz Y mS CV7 800 MHz Y mS CV8 1 0 GHz Y mS CV9 1 3 GHz Y mS CVIO 1 6 GHz Y mS CVII 1 8 GHz Y mS CVI2 2 0 GHz Y mS CV13 2 2 GHz Y mS CV14 2 4 GHz Y mS CV15 2 6 GHz Y
53. Multimeter 3458A 7mm N f Adapter 11524A N m BNC f Adapter p n 1250 0780 BNC f Banana Adapter p n 1251 2277 BNC Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A2 Adjustment Opt 001 in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 18 Figure 3 18 A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment Setup N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable 7mm N f Adapter 4 N N Lu DON x E SS N Ne Dual Banana to E4991A DO H BNC f Adapter Multimeter V Meas Do000 0 Gs D DD D gt y 005000 A 50500 X DOODOJ Soano 00D Test Head e4991ase014 Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant 144 Chapter 3 Adjustment A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment Opt 001 only A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment Opt 001 only The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the output current and the current monitor on the A2 DC Bias Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Multimeter 3458A 7mm N f Adapter 11524A N m BNC f Adapter p n 1250 0780 BNC f Banana Adapter p n 1251 2277 BNC Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program
54. Performance Tests Failure Troubleshooting on page 196 156 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To Troubleshoot the Instrument Figure 4 2 Primary Trouble Isolation Flowchart Primary Trouble Isolation Perform Power Up Check Display Display on Screen Check the Basic Function System Works Normaly Check the Measurement Function External Test Pass Performance Test Pass e4991ase051 Go to No Display Troubleshooting Go to Booting Process Troubleshooting Go to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Go to Function Depend Troubleshooting Go to External Test Failure Troubleshooting Go to Performance Test Failure Troubleshooting Adjustment Pass Chapter 4 Replace the Faulty Parts Go to Post Repair Procedure Bunoouse qnoJ py Figure 4 3 Troubleshooting No Display Troubleshooting No Display Troubleshooting If you encounter problems which there is no display isolate the failure part in accordance with the following procedure Connect the keyboard to the E4991A rear and turn the power on And start the trouble isolation No Display Trouble Isolation 4287ase04012 158 No Display Trouble Isolation Start Check LED on A50 Power Supply Check LED on Front Panel Hit Num Lock Key on Keyboard ED on Keyboard Light Yes Connect External Monitor Displayed Yes Check Flat Cable Between A51 LCD and A26 Display Board Flat Cable OK Check LCD Back Light CD Ba
55. Step 2 Choose the A2 Adjustment Opt 001 in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment Setup N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable Dual Banana to BNC f Adapter Multimeter Test Head e4991ase013 Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant Chapter 3 145 Figure 3 20 e4991ase019 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Adjustment A2 DC Bias Output Resistor Conductance Adjustment Opt 001 only A2 DC Bias Output Resistor Conductance Adjustment Opt 001 only The purpose of this procedure is to get the output resistor and the output conductance on the A2 DC Bias Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B furnished with E4991A Procedure Run the adjustment program Choose the A2 Adjustment Opt 001 in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 20 and Figure 3 21 A2 DC Bias Output R C Adjustment Setup 1 2 i EEE 000 l Jy
56. Then windows desktop screen is displayed Set up the IP address subnet mask a Open the shortcut menu by right clicking the Network Neighborhood icon on the desktop and click Properties This opens up the Network dialog box Figure 4 24 Network dialog box Network RHB Configuration Identification Access Control The following network components are installed S Client for Microsoft Networks BB 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C9058 T Y TCP IP s File and printer sharing for Microsoft Networks R o je o D 7 y O o 5 Q Add Remove Propertie Primary Network Logon Windows Logon h Eile and Print Sharing Description Cancel e4991a0j147 Chapter 4 181 Figure 4 25 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting b Click the TCP IP icon in the Configuration tab to select it c Click the Properties button This opens the TCP IP Properties dialog box Figure 4 25 TCP IP Properties dialog box IP Address tab TCP IP Properties ME Bindings Advanced NetBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration 1P Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Obtain an IP address automatically IP Address 192 168 0 1 Cancel 2499 130148 d
57. Troubleshooting Performance Tests Failure Troubleshooting Performance Tests Failure Troubleshooting Perform the following procedure sequentially when any performance tests fail Troubleshooting for Performance Test Failure Table 4 3 gives the recommended adjustments when the performance test fails You should perform the corresponding adjustments using the Spot Adjustment in the Adjustment Program as shown in Table 4 3 If the performance test still fails replace the assembly as shown in Table 4 4 Note that this table lists some typical cases In a few cases other assembly may actually be faulty Table 4 3 Recommended Adjustment for Performance Test Failure Ra First Failed Test Recommended Adjustment o Spot Adjustment in Adjustment Program E 3 E E 3 E B E B B 3 5 5 5 3 3 v T T lt lt lt lt lt e Tt a N lt lt lt lt lt l Frequency Accuracy Test Std Frequency Accuracy Test Opt 1D5 2 OSC Level Accuracy Test 3 Impedance measurement accuracy test 4 DC Bias Level accuracy Test Opt 001 Table 4 4 Isolate Faulty Assembly for Performance Test Failure Test First Failed Test Probable Faulty Assembly No Al Ref A3 A4 A2 DC AS Freq OSC Source Receiver Bias 001 Ref 1D5 1 Frequency Accuracy Test Std ttt Frequency Accuracy Test Opt 1D5 TIT 2 OSC Level Accuracy Test ttt 3 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test t HT 4 DC Bi
58. a CV85 mrad a CV86 800 MHz 20dBm Z W a CV87 mrad a CV88 1 0 GHz 20 dBm Z W a CV89 mrad a CV90 1 6 GHz 20 dBm Z W a CV91 mrad a CV92 1 8 GHz 20 dBm Z W a CV93 mrad a CV94 2 0 GHz 20 dBm Z W a CV95 mrad a CV96 2 2 GHz 20 dBm Z W a CV97 mrad a CV98 2 4 GHz 20 dBm Z W a CV99 q mrad a CV100 Chapter 2 67 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 2 6 GHz 20 dBm Iz W a CV101 q mrad a CV102 3 0 GHz 20 dBm IZ W a CV103 q mrad a CV104 68 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Airline with Short Averaging 8 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 1 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV105 mrad a CV106 10 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV107 y RE mrad a CV108 2 3 100 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV109 SA mrad a CV110 2 z 200MHz 3dBm Z W a CVIII v mrad a CV112 300MHz 3dBm Z W a CV113 mrad a CV114 500 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CVIIS5 mrad a CV116 600 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV117 mrad a CV118 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV119 mrad a CV120 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV121 mrad a CV122 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV123 mrad a CV124 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV125 mrad a CV126
59. e O 2 Chapter 5 223 Theory of Operation Digital Section A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive A27 mass storage disk drive is a 2 5 inches hard disk drive The disk drive is used to store the operating system firmware and user s measurement data The drive is mounted with shock resistance but be careful for the mechanical handling A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive A28 FDD is a 1 44 MBytes 3 5 inches MS DOS compatible and it is located on the front panel The FDD is used to store the measurement data and the instrument setup data A51 LCD Liquid Crystal Display A51 is an 8 4 inch color TFT LCD It consists of the LCD display and the backlight Video signal is provided from A26 Display Board through a flat cable A high voltage is supplied from A52 Inverter to the LCD s backlight The backlight determines the brightness of the LCD screen A52 Inverter Board A52 generates a high ac voltage required to drive LCD s backlight 224 Chapter 5 Theory of Operation Analog Section Analog Section The analog section consists of Al reference osc board A2 DC bias board Option 001 A3 source board A4 receiver board A5 reference oven board Option 1D5 A6 test head and A10 analog motherboard The A1 A2 A3 and A4 are controlled by A20 digital motherboard through A21 analog interface board and A10 analog motherboard e 2 D je es lt o 9 oO 5 O ien e O 2 Chapter 5 225 Theory of Operation Analog
60. gt ping 146 208 113 108 146 208 113 108 with 32 bytes of data timed out timed out timed out timed out To Check the LAN for serial prefix MY433 and later Procedure Exit from the E4991A Measurement Display as shown in How to exit from the E4991A Measurement View on page 155 Then windows desktop screen is displayed Connect a LAN cable between the LAN port on the rear panel and an external computer PC Use a crossed LAN cable to enable the peer to peer communication between the E4991A and the PC If the E4991A needs to be connected to the PC via a multi port Hub use a straight LAN cable Double click My Computer icon on Windows desktop of the E4991A And double click Control Panel The Control Panel window will appear Double click Network and Dial up Connections icon to show the Network and Dial up Connections window as shown in the left of Figure 4 29 184 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Figure 4 29 Network and Dial up Connections window i LL zik Enabled Connection Connection Disabled e5070bse117 Step 5 Check the Local Area Connection icon to confirm whether the network connection is enabled or disabled The meaning of the icon is shown in the right of Figure 4 29 If the connection is disabled Double click the Local Area Connection icon Step 6 Set up the IP address subnet mask as follows a Click the Lo
61. pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 32 W w 0 51 W q 86 5 mrad mrad 10 1 mrad 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 4 47 W W 0 51 W 89 5 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 4 62 W W 0 53 W 92 5 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 4 77 W W 0 53 W q 95 5 mrad mrad 10 9 mrad 106 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 2 6 kW kw 254W 117 8 mrad mrad 17 6 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 42 8 W W 43W 19 6 mrad mrad 2 0 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 2 15 W W 0 42 W 10 0 mrad mrad 2 0 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm Z 1 18 W w 0 22 W 11 7 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 78 W W 0 16 W 12 8 mrad mrad 2 6 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 47 W W 0 09 W 20 9 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 44 W W 0 09 W 44 5 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 59 W W 0 12 W 43 5 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1 25 W W 0 23 W 28 2 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 17 W W 0 72 W 48 6 mrad mrad 8 4
62. 1 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 1771Q 8 18 1 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 50 6 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 7 7Q 21 20 10 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 5 3 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 42 Q 8 05 100 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 1 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 22 0 6 76 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 200 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 16Q 5 79 300 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 6 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 6 19 500 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 09 O 5 58 600 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 800 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q 5 36 800 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 0 5 89 1 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 72 Q 6 14 1 6 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 29 0 7 12 1 8 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 20 100 14 99 2 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 8 87 2 2 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 9 41 2 2 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 12 8 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 64 Q 7 08 2 4 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 12 5 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 2 20 7 16 2 6 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 8 87 3 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 110 6 88 3 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 13 9 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 8 Fre
63. 13 6 mrad Chapter 2 101 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Performance Test Record Option 010 Frequency Accuracy Test Option 010 Without Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 MHz 10 00 Hz Hz 0 029 Hz 3 GHz 30 00 kHz kHz 0 085kHz With Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 MHz 1 00 Hz Hz 0 003 Hz 3 GHz 3 00 kHz kHz 0 008 kHz OSC Level Accuracy Test Option 010 Power Level Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 dBm 1 GHz 3 50 dB dB 0 22 dB 0 dBm 3 GHz 5 60 dB dB 0 35 dB 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 5 60 dB dB 0 35 dB 10 dBm 300 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 26 dB 15 dBm 1 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 22 dB 20 dBm 50 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 24 dB 25 dBm 1 GHz 3 50 dB dB 0 24 dB 30 dBm 10 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 22 dB 35 dBm 2 GHz 5 60 dB dB 0 24 dB 40 dBm 100 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 27 dB 102 Chapter2 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Option 010 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm 5 13 mS mS 0 61 mS 10 MHz 3 dBm Y 6 2
64. 172 To Execute the External Test on page 189 Frequency Accuracy Test Power Level Accuracy Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test A2 DC Bias Board Opt 001 Perform the following required adjustments using the A2 Adjustment in Spot Adjustment of the program A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment A2 DC Bias RC Adjustment System Backup To Execute the Internal Test on page 172 To Execute the External Test on page 189 DC Bias Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test A3 Source Board Perform the following required adjustments using the A3 Adjustment and A2 Adjustment Opt 001 in Spot Adjustment of the program A3 Local Level Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local level Adjustment A4 IF Local AGC Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment A2 DC Bias RC Adjustment 308 To Execute the Internal Test on page 172 To Execute the External Test on page 189 Power Level Accuracy Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Frequency Accuracy Test DC Bias Test System Backup Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 8 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC A4 Receiver Board Perform the following required To Execute the Inte
65. 2 7 7 2 4 For example the END message has been received before the closing quotation mark character appeared Invalid suffix The suffix here meaning Unit does not following the sentence structure defined by IEEEA88 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is not appropriate for the E4991A For example when the program message SOUR VOLT STAR 10dbm has been sent instead of the correct program message SOUR VOLT STAR 10mV the suffix is regarded by the E4991A as invalid Refer to the command reference to confirm the unit that should be used for this 348 Appendix E 272 261 109 32 92 61 113 Messages Macro execution error command M Macro execution error An execution error related to the E4991 A s macro functions has occurred Math error in expression A program data element that is a syntactically legal expression could not be executed due to a math error such as an attempted divide by zero Missing parameter A parameter is insufficient for a command or the parameter has not been inputted For example the SWE POIN command requires 1 parameter so when the program message SWE POIN has been sent instead of the correct program message SWE POIN 201 it is regarded as invalid by the E4991A because no parameter has been inputted Make sure to input a parameter for any command that requires one Must be more than 2 points for analysis Measurement points within the sweep range are set to 2 1f the partial search fun
66. 23 W W 0 03 W 21 2 mrad mrad 2 9 mrad 200 MHz 40 dBm Z 0 42 W W 0 07w 18 7 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 300 MHz 40 dBm 0 66 W W 0 12W 18 1 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 500 MHz 40 dBm Z 1 88 W W 0 31W 21 6 mrad mrad 3 6 mrad 600 MHz 40 dBm Z 5 17 W W 0 80W 33 2 mrad mrad 5 1 mrad 1 0 GHz 40 dBm 2 82 W W 0 45 W 32 7 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 3 GHz 40 dBm Z 1 39 W W 0 19W 63 2 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 1 6 GHz 40 dBm Z 1 20W w 0 12W 110 2 mrad mrad 11 0 mrad 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 224W W 0 31W 61 1 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 2 0 GHz 40 dBm Z 7 48 W W 0 92W 85 3 mrad mrad 10 4 mrad 2 4 GHz 40 dBm Z 15 72 W W 2 06 W 104 0 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad 2 6 GHz 40 dBm 5 12 W W 0 74 W q 93 1 mrad mrad 13 4 mrad Chapter 2 113 mn 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 8 GHz 40 dBm Z 2 76 W W 0 30w q 125 8 mrad mrad 13 7 mrad 114 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record DC Bias Test Option 001 amp Option 010 Bias Level Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 87 mV 4 V 10 0 mV mV 68 5 mV 0V 6 00 mV mV 13 3 mV O 4V 10 0 mV mV 45 5 mV E 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 88 mV S E
67. 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Opening Device Driver Property 5 Device Manager Sie Acton View e amp EE zw 3 28 AGT DDAGDCIADF7 E S Agilent devices IDE ATAJA Dissble P Keyboards Uninstall Mice and ot 51 3 x Scan for hardware changes EEE kad Properties o9 COM IFT video and game controllers E System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers e499 1ase 100 To check the Front Panel Procedure Randomly press the front panel keys and rotate the knob to verify that they work correctly You can check this function using the external test as showing in To Execute the Internal Test on page 172 If any fail to work it assumes that the A22 Front keyboard or A21 Analog Interface board gives problem Or it assume that any front panel key has been subsided in the panel To check the LCD You can check this function using the external test as showing in To Execute the Internal Test on page 172 To check the External Keyboard Procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E4991A rear Turn the E4991A on Press Menu key Press the gt 1 keys on the external keyboard and make sure that the cursor on the menu bar moves to up or down If any fail to work there is a possibility that the external keyboard or the A20 Digital Motherboard gives problem Chapter 4 179 R o je o D 7 y O o 5 Q
68. All Adjustment must be performed after performing this item This item is included in the All Adjustment Chapter 3 127 Figure 3 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Adjustment Adjustment Program How to perform the Adjustment Program The following is the simple procedure to perform the Adjustment Program For details refer to the Operation Manual for E4991A Adjustment Program If the following equipment is used for the E4991A Adjustment you need to use Agilent Edit Cal Calibration Data Editor If you don t use the following equipment go to step 3 8482A Power Sensor Install the latest version Rev A 02 30 as of November 2001 of Agilent Edit Cal before running the Adjustment Program if it is not installed in your PC For details refer to Operation Manual for Edit Cal The program and operation manual for the Edit Cal are downloadable from CTU Kobe web site Enter the calibration data of the Equipment 8482A in the Edit Cal Start the Agilent VEE Load the adjustment program file into the Agilent VEE as follows 1 Pull down the File menu from the Agilent VEE window and select Open 2 Select the file C adje4991a adje4991a vee and click Open You may be asked to add drivers for the equipment during the program loading Then click OK and the GPIB address for each equipment Enter 0 as the address for the equipment which are not used for the adjustment See Figure 3 4 Direct
69. CABLE TIE Chapter 6 265 Figure 6 19 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables e4991ase026 266 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Table 6 20 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 04287 66554 6 1 A4 RECEIVER BOARD 04287 69554 2 1 A4 RECEIVER BOARD Exchange 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 0515 0924 0 4 SCREW M3X0 5 2 04287 61601 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY 3 E4991 65001 6 1 N CONNECTOR ASSY 4 E4991 66502 4 1 A2 DC BIAS BOARS Opt 001 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 5 04287 61603 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 9170 1468 6 8 CORE TROID 1400 0249 0 2 CABLE TIE 8 04287 61605 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY 9 04287 61606 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY 10 04287 61602 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY 11 E4991 66553 5 1 A3 SOURCE BOARD E499 1 69553 1 1 SOURCE BOARD Exchange 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 12 04287 66511 5 1 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR 04287 69511 1 1 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR Exchange 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 13 04287 61011 8 1 FAN ASSY 0515 1666 9 4 SCREW M4X35 POZI Chapter 6 267 p J D 9 D O D c D T D Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Front Panel Figure 6 20 Front Panel
70. Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 The windows are Standard COMS Setup The default settings of all the Standard CMOS Setup options are described in the Standard CMOS Setup on page 202 Advanced CMOS Setup The default settings of all the Advanced CMOS Setup options are described in the Advanced CMOS Setup on page 203 e Advanced Chipset Setting The default settings of all the Advanced Chipset Setting options are described in the Advanced Chipset Setup on page 204 Power Management Setup The default settings of all the Power Management Setup options are described in the Power Management Setup on page 205 PCI Plug and Play Setup The default settings of all the PCI Plug and Play Setup options are described in the PCI Plug and Play Setup on page 206 e Peripheral Setup The default settings of all the Peripheral Setup options are described in the Peripheral Setup on page 207 e Auto Detect Hard Drive After replacing the A27 Mass Storage you can confirm whether the connection between the A27 and the A20 Digital Motherboard is good or not Because BIOS automatically configures the drive parameters after A27 has detected e Change User Password This option is unnecessary to use in the E4991A e Change Supervisor Password e Auto Configuration With Optimal Settings This option is unnecessary to use in the E4991A E 4
71. DC GC D C G C s9 uoqoun4 pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Test Head e4991ase014 2 Initialize the multimeter then set the NPLC to 100 and DCV function 3 Press Preset to preset the E4991A then set it as follows Setting Operation Osc Level 0 V 1 Source Osc Level 0 Enter DC Bias On Source DC Bias On Bias Source Voltage Source Bias Source Voltage Bias Limit 50 mA Source Bias Limit 5 0 k m Bias Level 40 V Source Bias Level 4 0 Enter 1 OSC level is set to 5 mV automatically 4 Press Trigger Setup Continuous 5 Subtract the analyzer setting 40V from the multimeter reading and record the result on the performance test record 6 Set the Bias Level to test the analyzer as shown in Table 2 2 and repeat Step 4 to 5 for other test points Chapter 2 43 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Table 2 2 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Voltage Settings Bias Voltage Setting 40 V AN OV 4V 40 V 7 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 12 Connect the BNC f Banana adapter to current measurement connectors with the GND connector connecting to the LO terminal Figure 2 12 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test current Setup N m BNC f Adapter 7mm N f BNC m BNC m Cable Adapter E4991A
72. Disk Drive Assembly Figure 6 27 Floppy Disk Drive Assembly o ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i pan n e4991ase096 Table 6 28 Floppy Disk Drive Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0950 4325 1 A28 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 2 04287 01203 6 1 FDD HOLDER 3 E5100 61661 1 1 CABLE FLAT 26PIN 4 2190 0583 3 M2 5 SPRING WASH 5 0515 1056 1 3 SCREW Chapter 6 279 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Figure 6 28 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly 4287ase06013 Table 6 29 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 61200 1 HDD INSTALLED 2 0515 0924 0 4 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 1410 1580 5 4 BUSHING 4 E5070 24011 4 PLATE 5 04287 01211 6 1 HDD BRACKET 6 04287 01204 7 1 HDD HOLDER 280 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Power Supply Assembly Figure 6 29 Power Supply Assembly p J D 9 D O D c D T D a n 4287ase06012 Table 6 30 Power Supply Assembly Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 0950 3396 8 1 PWR SPLY 225W 2 0515 0924 0 2 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 04287 60003 8 1 BRACKET P S ASSY 4 04287 61011 8 1 FAN ASSY 5 0515 1666 9 4 SCREW M4X35 POZI 6 1400 2198 2 2 SADDLE EDGE
73. F Termination No Substitute HP 909C Opt 012 1 T Cable BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 1 P A BNC m BNC m Cable 122 cm p n 8120 1840 1 N m N m Cable 61 cm 11500B 1 T Adapter N m BNC f Adapter p n 1250 0780 1 P A 7mm N f Adapter 11524A 1 P A 7mm N m Adapter 11525A 1 A Dual Banana BNC Adapter 1251 2277 1 P A Coaxial Termination Feed Thru 11048C 1 P Chapter 1 21 General Information Required Equipment Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty Use Torque Wrench Size 3 4 inch p n 8710 1766 1 P Torque 136 N cm 1 P Performance Tests F Function Tests A Adjustment T Troubleshooting 2 Opt 050 and Opt 124 can be substituted for Opt 030 In this case a N m BNC f adapter is necessary 3 438A cannot be used with E4412A or E9304A 4 8481D is not necessary for Adjustment 5 E4412A is not necessary for Adjustment 6 1f E9304A is used the multimeter is not necessary 7 16195B is a furnished accessory for the E4991A 22 Chapter 1 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test This chapter provides information on how to verify the E4991A performance The maintenance consists of performance test and function test 23 Performance Test and Function Test Required Equipment Required Equipment The required test equipment for the performance test and
74. Ifthe IP Address and the Subnet Mask are not assigned yet enter them as follows IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 If they are already assigned go to step 4 The following is how to enter the IP Address and the Subnet Mask Click the Specify an IP address option button in the IP Address tab to select it and input your IP address in the IP Address box and your subnet mask in the Subnet Mask box overwrite the initial values to assign a specific IP address and subnet mask Step 4 Shut down the E4991A Figure 4 26 a Click the OK button to close the TCP IP Properties dialog box b Click the OK button to close Network dialog box This opens the System Setup Change dialog box Figure 4 26 System Setup Change dialog box System Settings Change 2 You must restart your computer before the new settings will take effect Do you want to restart your computer now e4891a0j150 c Click the Yes button to restart the E4991A 182 Chapter 4 NOTE Figure 4 27 Step 5 Step 6 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Shut down the E4991A by following the procedure below if you click the No button by mistake 1 Click Start Shut Down 2 Click the Shut down button in the Shut Down Windows dialog box to select it 3 Click the OK button Turn the E4991A on again after shutdown Then the LAN settings take effect Open the DOS prompt by the following the mouse procedure from person
75. Keyboard NOTE When KEYBD TEST is failed perform the internal test using the mouse SYSTEM COLOR TEST 1 Turn off the instrument and then turn on it 2 Usually this fail is disappeared after rebooting 174 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Functions The E4991A has the following typical functions The hardkeys and knob located on the front panel are divided 4 blocks labeled Entry Navigation block Measurement block Stimulus block and System block respectively Some of the front panel keys control the E4991A functions directly Refer to To check the Front Panel on page 179 if you want to check the front panel Almost all the information required for the measurement value setup state result data processing menu bar softkey label and others is indicated on the color LCD display An 8 4 inch TFT display is used Refer to To check the LCD on page 179 if you want to check the LCD Use of the external keyboard ensures effective entry of the numerical value and character string which is connected to the E4991A rear panel Refer to To check the External Keyboard on page 179 if you want to check the external keyboard Use of the mouse allow you to freely move the pointer on the E4991A LCD display and effective perform a great variety setups which is connected to the E4991 A rear panel Refer to To check the Mouse on page
76. Limit Test Result R PR 1 dBm 1 GHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 22 dB 9 44 0 dBm 3 GHz 6 00dB 3 00dB dB 0 35 dB 8 72 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 6 00dB 3 00dB dB 0 35 dB 8 62 10 dBm 300 MHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 26 dB 1 88 15 dBm 1 MHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 22 dB 9 40 20 dBm 50 MHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 24 dB 8 57 25 dBm 1 GHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 24 dB 8 57 30 dBm 10 MHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 22 dB 9 38 35 dBm 2 GHz 6 00dB 3 00dB dB 0 24 dB 12 69 40 dBm 100 MHz 4 00dB 2 00dB dB 0 27 dB 1 63 Change 6 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Option 007 Page 90 to 101 to the following information and appended TAR to this report Standard Averaging 8 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Option 007 Standard Averaging 8 Open Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result e TR 1 MHz 3 dBm Y us 0 38 uS 32 55 10 MHz 3 dBm Y us 0 80 uS 16 85 100 MHz 3 dBm Y us 3 4 HS 7 57 200 MHz 3 dBm Y US 6 6 uS 6 13 300 MHz 3 dBm Y uS 9 8 uS 5 53 500 MHz 3 dBm Y uS 17 uS 5 09 600 MHz 3 dBm Y uS 21 uS 4 94 800 MHz 3 dBm Y uS 28 uS 4 90 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y us 35 uS 4 81 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y us 46 uS 6 40 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y us 61 uS 6 15 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y uS 70
77. MHz 3 dBm Y us 9 8 uS 4 58 500 MHz 3 dBm Y us 17 uS 4 39 600 MHz 3 dBm Y US 21 uS 4 62 800 MHz 3 dBm Y us 28 uS 4 63 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y US 35 US 4 61 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y US 46 uS 6 24 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y US 61 uS 6 03 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y US 69 uS 6 11 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y uS 126 uS 5 49 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y us 140 uS 5 60 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y us 155 uS 5 69 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y us 171 uS 5 82 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y us 186 uS 5 98 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y US 203 LS 6 14 Standard Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Level Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 2 6mQ 5 25 10 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 3 6 mQ 5 05 100 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 15mQ 4 49 200 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 26 mQ 4 51 300 MHz 3 dBm Z ma 31 mQ 5 43 500 MHz 3 dBm Z ma 51 mQ 25 25 600 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 51 mQ 6 24 800 MHz 3 dBm Z mO 51 mQ 8 23 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mO 51mQ 10 23 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 6 63 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 8 13 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 9 12 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z ma 201 mQ 5 06 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z ma 201 mQ 5 56 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 6 06 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 6 56 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 7 06 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 7 55 Standard 500 Averaging 8 Frequency Power Measurement Test Result Measurement T
78. Measurement Uncertainty value of Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Page 76 to 87 to the following information and appended TAR to this report Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Standard Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Y us 0 61 uS 8 42 10 MHz 3 dBm Y us 0 46 uS 13 61 100 MHz 3 dBm Y us 3 3 uS 5 45 200 MHz 3 dBm Y US 6 5 uS 4 85 300 MHz 3 dBm Y us 9 8 uS 4 58 500 MHz 3 dBm Y us 17uS 4 39 600 MHz 3 dBm Y us 21 uS 4 62 800 MHz 3 dBm Y us 28 uS 4 63 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y us 35 US 4 61 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y us 46 uS 6 24 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y us 61 uS 6 03 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y us 69 uS 6 11 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y US 126 uS 5 49 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y us 140 uS 5 60 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y us 155 uS 5 69 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y us 171 uS 5 82 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y us 186 uS 5 98 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y US 203 uS 6 14 Standard Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 2 6 mQ 5 25 10 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 3 6 mQ 5 05 100 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 15mQ 4 49 200 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 26 mQ 4 51 300 MHz 3 dBm Z mO 31 mQ 5 43 500 MHz 3 dBm Z mO 51 mQ 5 25 600 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 51 mQ 6 24 800 MHz 3 dBm Z mO 51 mQ 8 23 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z
79. Other Parts e4991ase092 260 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later 2 ES Table 6 17 Top View Cables 8 o Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description g Desig a l 54801 61610 4 I FLAT CABLE ASSY 2 54801 61611 5 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 3 04396 61707 3 1 CABLE ASSY 4 04287 61607 0 1 FLAT CABLE 5 E4991 61606 9 1 WIRE ASSY 6 E4991 61605 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY 7 E5100 61661 1 1 CABLE FLAT 26PIN 8 54801 61636 4 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 9 54801 61635 3 1 WIRE ASSY 10 04287 61609 2 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 11 04287 61632 1 1 WIRE ASSY 12 04287 61633 2 1 WIRE ASSY Chapter 6 261 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Top View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 6 17 Top View Miscellaneous Parts
80. Power ON and OFF Turning the Power ON and OFF Perform the following steps to turn the power ON or OFF Turning the power ON If the standby switch 0 in the lower left part of the front panel is in the pressed down LTL position press the switch to the popped up position LL Press the standby switch to the pressed down position RL This operation turns ON the power and the E4991A starts the self test Confirm that the self test indicates normal operation Normal operation is confirmed by the self test if no error message appears Turning the power OFF Use either of the following methods to turn OFF the E4991A Press the standby switch 5 in the lower left part of the front panel now in the pressed down ZL position to the popped up Lb position Send the shutdown command from an external controller These operations will start the E4991A shutdown process required software and hardware processes for turning the power off and the power will turn OFF after a few seconds Under normal circumstances always press the standby switch or send the shutdown command from the external controller to actuate the E4991A shutdown process Never cut off the power supply directly by disconnecting the power cable plug from the rear panel of the unit If the power supply is cut off directly by disconnecting the power cable plug or by disconnecting the power supply to the AC outlet the shutdown process will n
81. Screen Did it Shutdown Propery J Scan Disk Check Bunoouse qnoJ py F Windows desktop Screen G E4991A Measurement View H E4991A Power On Self Test e4991ase033 Chapter 4 161 Figure 4 7 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Video BIOS Boot Video BIOS title screen shown in Figure 4 7 is displayed first when the E4991A turned on If the Video BIOS title screen doesn t displayed go to No Display Troubleshooting on page 158 A Video BIOS Title Screen CHIPS 65558 PCI amp UL Accelerated VGA BIOS Uideo BIOS Uersion 2 8 8 DECOMPILATION OR DISASSEMBLY PROHIBITED HP Infinian BIOS Version 1 1 18 13 97 Copyright C 1996 Chips and Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved BIOS RAM Counting BIOS logo screen shown in Figure 4 8 describes the BIOS name model number of the Digital Motherboard CPU type and RAM size on the Digital Motherboard and type of the Mass Storage If the message is displayed you can assume that A20 Digital Motherboard CPU and DIMM64MB are functioning correctly If the E4991A stops during checking RAM you can assume problem is in the A20 or DIMM64MB Hit Delete key on the external keyboard as soon as the message of Hit DEL if you want to run SETUP is displayed during RUM counting if you want run the BIOS setup utility It is able to be the followings using the BIOS setup utili
82. Se E E BNC m BNC m Cable Ud 000000060 a e TO Ref In o Ede Tom a om CO Do wm KE O dE Gp CUE GER o fe i Frequency Counter BNC m BNC m Cable e4991ase017 w Z Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant ri n Step 5 Adjust Reference Oven Adjustment screw as shown in Figure 3 17 so that the counter 3 reading is 10MHz 1Hz if the counter reading is out of 1OMHz 1Hz Then remove side strap handle Figure 3 17 Reference Oven Adjustment Screw DOCCOL TOOL OLOR E E OOO LODO OO 8982828 oa eee nas asas al aso otto OO SS 9 IN E salas al BREQEQELESBISOSESIGOSEOSESESI5IG0 nasal seas a a Sa as S S o Sos oso co CPUS OREO S eo ES 2 O00000 00200020000 0R0 E000 asc E E a e4991ase021 Chapter 3 143 Adjustment A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment Opt 001 only A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment Opt 001 only The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the output voltage and the voltage monitor on the A2 DC Bias Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model
83. State Uideo Power Down Mode Hard Disk Power Down Mode Hard Disk Time Out Minute Stanby Suspend Timer Unit Standby Time Out Suspend Time Dut Slow Clock Ratio Modem Make up LAN Make Up RTC Wake Up Hour Minute Display Activity ESC Exit T Sel Device 6 Serial port 1 PgUp PgDn Mod i f Device 7 Serial port 2 Polar Device 5 Floppy disk Device 8 Primary master IDE Device 1 Primary slave IDE ESC Exit T Sel Device 2 Secondary master IDE PgUp PgDn Modify Device 3 Secondary slave IDE F2 F3 Color S 4 p e el o 4 0 3 e e 2 Q Chapter 4 205 Figure 4 40 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 PCI Plug and Play Setup PCI Plug and Play Setup options are displayed by choosing PCI Plug and Play Setup using gt fl keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 40 1s displayed Compare the default BIOS options as shown in Figure 4 40 with your E4991A s BIOS options If there is difference change BIOS option using gt f1 keys PageUp key and PageDown key If you want to exit from this page and go to main menu hit ESC key PCI PLUG AND PLAY SETUP Page AMIBIOS SETUP PCI PLUG AND PLAY SETUP C 1938 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Available Options No PCI Latency Timer PCI Clocks PCI VGA Palette Snoop Yes Allocate IRQ to
84. System is a software to control the data input output of the personal computer The E4991A has the BIOS inside Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options known as the BIOS setup utility Run the BIOS setup utility You can use the external keyboard in the BIOS setup utility to perform various functions Step 1 Connect the external keyboard to the E4991A rear panel Then turn the E4991A on Step 2 Hit Delete key as soon as the message of Hit DEL if you want to run SETUP is displayed Step 3 Enter password as e4991a when you are required it Then Figure 4 35 is displayed Figure 4 35 BIOS setup utility main menu Page AMIBIOS HIFLEX SETUP UTILITY VERSION 1 18 C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced Chipset Setup Power Management Setup PCI Plug and Play Setup Peripheral Setup fAuto Detect Hard Disks Change User Password Change Supervisor Password Buta Configuration with Optimal Settings Auto Configuration with Fail Safe Settings Save Settings and Exit Exit Without Saving Standard CMOS setup for changing time date hard disk type etc ESC Exit N Sel F2 F3 Color Fi8 Save 8 Exit The BIOS setup utility has 11 windows For details of the BIOS options in the each window are described in bellow pages You can select a window using gt fl keys or Tab key and perform an operation using Enter key 200 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To
85. System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later Step 6 The following screen appears Select Removable Devices with of the keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Hard Drive CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN lt Enter Setup gt Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the factory recovery press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options Choose One of the following Recover Factory Backup Image Create User Backup Image Recover User Backup Image Exit B WN H Enter a Choice _ NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 9B8J0 S SSEN ZW W LD lt E o oO 3 EJ a e y D ct e 3 o Appendix B 321 Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE Step 11 System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the system recovery press E here You chose to Restore your system by installing the original factory installed OS and system software WARNING Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want to proceed The C Drive will be complete
86. Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 20 dBm Z 14 5 kW kw 1771W 663 4 mrad mrad 50 6 mrad 10 MHz 20 dBm 161 8 W W 7 7W q 74 2 mrad mrad 5 3 mrad 100 MHz 20 dBm 3 33 W W 0 42W 15 5 mrad mrad 2 1 mrad 200 MHz 20 dBm 1 47 W W 0 22 W 14 6 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 20 dBm 0 91 W W 0 16 W q 14 9 mrad mrad 2 6 mrad 500 MHz 20 dBm 0 52 W W 0 09 w 23 1 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 20 dBm 0 48 W W 0 09 W 48 5 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 800 MHz 20 dBm 0 63 W W 0 12 W q 46 6 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 1 0 GHz 20 dBm 1 34 W W 0 23 W 30 2 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 6 GHz 20 dBm 4 39 W W 0 72 W 51 2 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 1 8 GHz 20 dBm 2 01 W W 0 29 W q 60 6 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 2 0 GHz 20 dBm 1 38 W W 0 10 W 217 6 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 2 2 GHz 20 dBm 2 09 W W 0 23 W 120 7 mrad mrad 12 8 mrad 2 4 GHz 20 dBm 4 47 W W 0 64 W q 88 4 mrad mrad 12 5 mrad 82 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 6 GHz 20 dBm vA 15 4 W W 2 2W q 102 6 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 3 0 G
87. Top View Under Power Supply a a 9 47 Read ranned R A L ete m teenies 240 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables aaa aaa aaa 242 Front Panel wasz od O OSOZ PARA OEB PESO eT US pereas 244 Front Panel Back Side c w tu Ro UR ee ba ea eee bee die TE 246 R al VIeWio tenses aip atthe Ona ay s taie ea bade elits eb hehe ee A GE ie aera 247 Sid VIEW iis Er Xd A IRR A She ped acetum id s d RARE ZT Ned 248 Contents Pest Head A A Ad t A aedes da deo 250 Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test KIL 252 Test Head for Option 010 aR lt S ang ru am edades und Rer Rh ERIT Ege 254 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly 255 Power Supply Assembly ee rh 256 Other Parts cep ti CHECA UNIS 256 Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later 0 2 eke ee eee 258 Power Cables and Plug Configurations teen teenies 258 Top View Major Assembly een m 258 Top View Cables amp Other Parsi 260 Top View Miscellaneous Parsi 262 Top View Under Power Supply eena E TR R Yar cece m 264 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables ce eee eee eee eens 266 Front Panic a A ba tint ago HUND ean RR UMS 268 Front Panel Back Sd wta REA m xn eme A PR 270 R ar VIEW lt lt id ELI PI ERR OLAS HB io 271 Side VIEW MEE 272 Test Hed iu A A W EW PE ad E 274 Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test it u n uuu aunean uree 276 Test Hedd for Option 010 td A A A rex TER RR ee ts 00 278 Floppy Disk Dri
88. W q 25 1 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 1 41 W W 0 24 W 28 1 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 2 28 W W 0 24 W 45 6 mrad mrad 4 7 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 2 51 W w 0 24 W q 50 2 mrad mrad 4 8 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 2 66 W W 0 24 W 53 2 mrad mrad 4 8 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 4 05 W W 0 51 W 81 2 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 4 20 W W 0 51 W q 84 2 mrad mrad 10 3 mrad 92 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 35 W W 0 51W 87 2 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 50 W W 0 51W 90 2 mrad mrad 10 3 mrad 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 4 65 W W 0 51W 93 2 mrad mrad 10 3 mrad 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 80 W W 0 51W q 96 2 mrad mrad 10 3 mrad Chapter 2 93 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 5 9 kW kw 296W 272 0 mrad mrad 10 3 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 79 3 W W 5 3W q 36 3 mrad mrad 2 3 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm 2 80 W W 0 42W
89. Z Q 4530 15 15 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 3 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 42 Q 6 79 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 0 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 240 220 6 75 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 16 0 5 94 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 6 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 6 38 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 8 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 20 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 800 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 20 120 5 12 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 5 60 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 72 Q 5 92 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 290 6 93 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 10 Q 14 54 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 8 87 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 9 31 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 12 8 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 64 Q 6 95 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 12 6 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 220 6 94 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 8 87 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 1 10 6 75 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 9 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 969 0 19 90 1 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 61 5 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 10 50 20 37 10 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 3 4 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 42 Q 9 98 100 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 0 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 7 96 200 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 8 87 300 M
90. agreement To continue with Setup you must accept the agreement Muerte mri ye Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Licensed Copies 9ears btesthreste ceo seveodeveotes END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Pr rr rr rms IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement accept this agreement don t accept this agreement Back Next 330 Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later Step 5 In the Network Identification Wizard dialog box 1 2 select the Windows always assumes the following user has logged on to this computer box and check that agt instr is in the User Name box If not type in agt_instr Finally click the Next button Figure B 7 Figure B 7 Network Identification Wizard dialog box 1 2 Network Identification Wizard Users of This Computer Who can log on to this computer 1 You can require all users to enter a user name and password to log on or you can have Windows assume the same user will always log on to this computer Which option do you prefer User must enter a user name and password to use this computer indows always assumes the following user has logged on to this computer agt instr lt Back Ned Camel e4991ase105 Step 6 In the Network Identification Wizard dialog box 2 2 click the Finish button to finish the initial registration of the E4991A Figure B 8 Then the measurement d
91. board perform A2 Adjustment Opt 001 If you replace or adjust 45 board perform 45 Adjustment Opt 1D5 If you replace the Standard Test Head perform amp 3 Adjustment and A2 Adjustment Opt 001 For more detailed adjustment procedure refer to the chapter of Adjustment ar Post Repair Procedure in the Service Manual gt 2 c 0 e E D 5 3 Chapter 3 131 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Adjustment Initialization of the System Calibration Data Initialization of the System Calibration Data The EEPROM has the system calibration data When the EEPROM on the A21 Analog Interface Board is replaced it is necessary to initialize the EEPROM using the EEPROM Initialize in the Adjustment Program All Adjustment must be performed after performing this item This item 1s included in the All Adjustment When you encounter the error regarding the EEPROM such as EEPROM TEST Fail or EEPROM CSUM ERROR firstly perform this item to disappear it Required Equipment Nothing Procedure Run the adjustment program Choose the EEPROM Initialize in the Main Menu It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Make sure that nothing is connected to the E4991A Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant All Adjustment must be performed after performing this item 132 Chapter 3 Adjustment A1 VCXO Frequency Adjustment Al VCXO Fre
92. correctly executed For example attempts have been made to read and write on a file that does not exist or a disk has not been properly inserted Frequency sweep only A command that is only valid when the sweep parameter is in frequency has been sent For example when a sweep parameter other than frequency is set the CALC 1 5 MARK UNIT command is attempted in order to set the marker X axis display to relaxation time 1 2pf First use the SWE TYPE command to set the sweep parameter to frequency G GET not allowed While receiving a program message the Group Execution Trigger GET command in HTBasic has been inputted refer to IEEE4888 2 7 7 For example a wait command such as OPC or WAI has been sent I Illegal parameter value The parameter value is not appropriate For example when the program message DISP TRAC1 Y SPAC OBAS has been sent instead of the correct program message DISP TRACI Y SPAC LOG the parameter rate is regarded by the E4991A as inappropriate sobessan J Refer to the command reference and confirm that the parameter value is correctly inputted Impedance measurement mode only A command has been sent that is only valid for Impedance Measurement Mode For example during the Magnetic Material Measurement Mode the SENS CORR2 CKIT STAN1 C command has been attempted in order to define the user defined fixture compensation kit Select Impedance Measurement Mode Init ignored Becaus
93. e4991ase030 268 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Table 6 21 Front Panel Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5182 7594 2 1 KNOB 2 E4991 00201 1 FRONT PANEL 3 E4991 00202 3 1 SUB PANEL 4 E5100 40001 9 1 FRONT BEZEL 5 04287 40004 7 1 GUIDE FOR CURSOR KEY 6 E4991 25002 3 1 RUBBER KEY CURSOR 7 E4991 25001 2 1 RUBBER KEY 8 E4991 66522 8 1 FRONT KEYBOARD 9 04287 40001 4 1 FRONT BEZEL 10 04287 25003 4 1 OPTICAL FILTER 11 2090 0396 0 1 LCD DISPLAY 04287 25004 5 1 GASKET 12 5022 1190 4 1 FRONT FRAME 13 0371 3953 5 1 KEY CAP 14 04287 01212 7 1 BRACKET SW 0515 0999 9 2 SCREW M2 5X0 45 L 6 FL 15 04287 61901 7 1 WIRE ASSY WITH SWITCH Chapter 6 269 2 J D 9 D O D c D T D Figure 6 21 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Front Panel Back Side Front Panel Back Side
94. ef tne A ES E IR CU DEPO EE DU e de Mare OU old 292 Contents A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later 1 1 293 Tools Required oot om A Eh EE 293 lane A BALE BOR O Ezd 293 CPU Replacement for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 aaa aaa ia 294 Tools Required AA EA et ue tete ip eiut de ie di p 294 Procedure scenes etu Eb eta di Lotes RAE 294 DIMM64MB Memory Module Replacement for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 296 Procedure l p A a V E 296 A1 A2 Opt 001 A3 A4 Board Removal 296 Tools Required A O SO ee RUN Ea id 296 A og chet e E T ATE TE a tan tute tats A tans Dh Madde eds Ea see 296 AS Reference Oven Board Opt 1D5 Removal 298 Tools Requited o iid det Ai et en teet dettes ut kpl SER t ERR UE RUN 298 Procedure sene few Netti eh wih ade betae oS PT Re E QUE READER Ege us RE A 298 A10 Analog Motherboard Removal 298 Tools Requited a E Ee 298 luni ne 298 A2 Analog Interface Board and EEPROM Removal 00 cee eee 299 Tools Requited pet ia un Se tae etu 299 PIOCEJUTE nai Slaw el 299 A24 GPIB A25 LAN Board Removal for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 300 Tools REQUIRE TA 300 PIOCEGUIe Score m veo con A BOA nir tok erat 300 A24 GPIB Card Replacement for serial prefix MY433 and later 20 0 eee eee eee eee 301 Tools Requited ii e cette e Cete de cere dem tuti dpt gre ch 301 Removal Proc
95. from electrical shock the power cable ground must not be defeated The power plug must be plugged into an outlet that provides a protective earth ground connection 340 Appendix D Figure D 1 Power cable options OPTION 900 United Kingdom Plug BS 1363 A 250V 10A Cable 8120 1351 8120 8705 OPTION 902 Continental Europe Plug CEE 7 Standard Sheet VIL 250V 10A Cable 8120 1689 OPTION 904 U S Canada Plug NEMA 6 15P 250V 6A Cable 8120 0698 OPTION 912 Plug SR 107 2 D 250V 10A Cable 8120 2956 OPTION 918 Plug JIS C 8303 125V 12A Cable 8120 4753 OPTION 921 Plug CEI 23 16 250V 10A Cable 3120 6978 Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply OPTION 901 Australia New Zealand Plug AS 3112 250V 10A Cable 3120 1369 OPTION 903 U S Canada Plug NEMA 5 15P 125V 10A Cable 8120 1378 OPTION 906 Switzerland Plug SEV Type 12 250V 10A Cable 8120 2104 OPTION 917 _India Republic of S Africa Plug IEC 83 B1 250V 10A Cable 8120 4211 Argentina OPTION 920 Plug Argentine Resolution 63 Annex IV 250V 10A Cable 8120 6870 OPTION 922 Plug GB 1002 250V 10A Cable 8120 8376 NOTE Each option number includes a family of cords and connectors of various materials and plug body configurations straight 90 etc power_e Appendix D 341 juawau1nbay J9MOg q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 1 NOTE Power Requirement Turning the
96. mS CV16 2 8 GHz Y mS CVI7 3 0 GHz Y mS CV18 Chapter 2 53 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Short Termination Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation 1 MHz Z mw CVI9 10 MHz Z mw CV20 100 MHz Z mW CV21 200 MHz Z mW CV22 300 MHz Z mW CV23 500 MHz Z mW CV24 600 MHz Z mW CV25 800 MHz Z mW CV26 1 0 GHz Z mW CV27 1 3 GHz Z mW CV28 1 6 GHz Z mW CV29 1 8 GHz Z mW CV30 2 0 GHz Z mW CV31 2 2 GHz Z mW CV32 2 4 GHz Z mW CV33 2 6 GHz Z mW CV34 2 8 GHz Z mw CV35 3 0 GHz Z mW CV36 54 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard 50 W Termination Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation 1 MHz Z W CV37 mrad CV38 N 10 MHz Z W CV39 v D mrad CV40 aa 33 100 MHz Z w CV41 s 8 mrad CV42 o 4 2g 200 MHz Z W CV43 m q mrad CV44 300 MHz Z W CV45 mrad CV46 500 MHz Z W CV47 mrad CV48 600 MHz Z W CV49 q mrad CV50 800 MHz Z w CV51 mrad CV52 1 0 GHz Z w CV53 mrad CV54 1 3 GHz Z W CV55 mrad CV56 1 6 GHz Z w CV57 mrad CV58 1 8 GHz Z W CV59 mrad CV60 2 0 GHz Z w CV6I q mrad CV62 2 2 GHz Z W CV63 mrad CV64 2 4 GHz Z W C
97. measurement sales representative 21 01 2004 United States Test and Measurement Call Center tel 1 800 452 4844 fax 1 888 900 8921 Canada Test and Measurement Call Center tel 1877 894 4414 fax 1 888 900 8921 China tel 800 810 0189 fax 800 820 2816 Europe tel 31 20 547 2323 fax 31 20 547 2390 Japan Call Center tel 0120 421 345 tel 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Korea tel 82 2 2004 5004 fax 82 2 2004 5115 Latin America tel 305 269 7500 fax 305 269 7599 Taiwan tel 0800 047 866 fax 0800 286 331 Australia New Zealand tel 61 3 9210 5555 Australia fax 61 3 9210 5899 tel 64 4 939 0636 New Zealand fax 64 4 972 5364 Asia Pacific tel 65 6375 8100 fax 65 6836 0252 Email tm_asia agilent com
98. mrad mrad 13 4 mrad 86 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 8 GHz 40 dBm vA 2 76 W W 0 30W q 125 8 mrad mrad 13 7 mrad Chapter 2 87 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record DC Bias Test Option 001 Bias Level Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 99 mV 4 V 10 0 mV mV 57 3 mV U Y 6 00 mV mV 27 8 mV 4V 10 0 mV mV 48 6 nV 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 98 mV 50 mA 120 0 mA mA 9 4 mA 4 mA 28 0 mA mA 1 2 mA 100 mA 20 2 mA mA 1 0 mA 100 mA 20 2 mA mA 1 2 mA 4mA 28 0 mA mA 1 2 mA 50 mA 120 0 mA mA 9 1 mA 88 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Performance Test Record Option 007 OSC Level Accuracy Test Option 007 Power Level Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 dBm 1 GHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 0 dBm 3 GHz 6 00 3 00 dB dB 0 35 dB gt 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 6 00 3 00 dB dB 0 35 dB Z 3 10 dBm 300 MHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 26 dB 8 15 dBm 1 MHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 2 gt 20 dBm 50 MHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 24 dB B 25 dBm 1 GHz 4 00 2 00 dB dB 0 24 dB
99. mw 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z 1113 mw mW 201 mW 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 1213 mw mW 201 mw 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 1313 mw mW 201 mw 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 1413 mw mW 201 mw 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1513 mw mW 201 mw 104 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 50W Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 35 W W 0 09 W 7 0 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 36 W W 0 09 W 7 2 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 43 W W 0 09 W 8 5 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 58 W W 0 11 W 11 5 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 65 W W 0 14W 13 0 mrad mrad 2 7 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 80 W W 0 19W 16 0 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm Z 1 08 W W 023W 21 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 800 MHz 3 dBm 1 23 W W 0 23 W 24 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1 38 W W 0 23 W 27 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z 2 25 W w 024W 45 0 mrad mrad 4 7 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 2 48 W w 024W 49 5 mrad mrad 4 8 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 2 63 W W 024W 52 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 02 W W 0 51W 80 5 mrad mrad 10 1 mrad 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 4 17 W W 0 51W q 83 5 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad Chapter 2 105 mn 2 e pur e 2 D n
100. re write instrument ID in EEPROM This process can not be performed without inputting a password This password is ctuKobe How to confirm the E4991A option installed You can know the E4991A option number and firmware revision by the following E4991A mouse procedure Click System on the E4991A System menu Click About E4991A and then About E4991A dialog box as shown in Figure 3 22 will be open About E4991A dialog box eqq E4991A OPTION 001 002 1D5 LPR Rev 0 9956 0 9956 0404 0400 Copyright C 2001 Agilent Technologies Portions Copyright C 1996 Microsoft Corporation All Rights reserved 24991 aojl 45 The E4991A option number and firmware revision are appeared in the dialog box Or by the following E4991A front panel procedure Press System key on the E4991A front panel Move the cursor to About E4991A using the arrow key and press Click key on the front panel The E4991A option number and firmware revision is displayed in the dialog box 148 Chapter 3 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Adjustment System Backup for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 System Backup for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 The E4991A has the system files application files and correction constant data in the C drive of the hard disk The E4991A also has a backup file in the H drive Hidden Drive of the hard disk drive which includes a comp
101. result into the Test Result column of the performance test record Chapter 2 27 NOTE NOTE Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Frequency Accuracy Test This test verifies the E4991A s test signal frequency accuracy with an external frequency counter Specification Frequency Accuracy 10 ppm without Option 1D5 ppm with Option 1D5 Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter 53131 2A Opt 010 and 030 or 53181A Opt 010 and 030 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 N m BNC f Adapter p n 1250 0780 7mm N f Adapter 11524A 1 Opt 050 and Opt 124 can be substituted for Opt 030 In this case a N m BNC f adapter is necessary Procedure In the following procedure the 53181A is used Perform the same operation if another frequency counter is used 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 1 For testing the analyzer equipped with Option 1D5 connect a BNC m BNC m cable between the Ext Ref In connector and the Ref Oven Option 1D5 connector on the analyzer rear panel For testing without Option 1D5 disconnect the above BNC m BNC m cable 28 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Figure 2 1 Frequency Accuracy Test Setup 1 N m BNC f Adapter 7mm N f Adapter E4991A nen Frequency Counter
102. screen on the external monitor is the same as the screen on the LCD If screen is not displayed on the external monitor there is a possibility that the A26 Display board gives problem 180 Chapter 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Figure 4 24 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting To check the External Trigger Input Procedure Press Preset key Then the E49914 is initialized Select the trigger source to EXTERNAL by following front panel procedure Trigger Setup Trigger Source External Attach the 50ohm termination BNC to the E4991A Ext Trig connector rear then a trigger is generated and measurement data is displayed Remove the 500hm termination BNC from the E4991A Ext Trig connector rear then a trigger is generated and measurement data is displayed If measurement doesn t execute under the external trigger in spite of the internal trigger works properly there is a possibility that the A21 Analog Interface board gives problem To check the LAN for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Procedure Connect the LAN cable between the E4991A rear and the personal computer If you have a crossed LAN cable it is available to connect with them directly Or if have a straight LAN cable it is available to connect with them via multi port Hub Exit from the E4991A Measurement Display as shown in How to exit from the E4991A Measurement View on page 155
103. system recovery oooooooo e m 320 Procedure to create the user backup Image ununun nunna 323 Procedure to execute the user recovery function uaeaaaaaaaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa 326 Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later 329 C Firmware Update Firmware Update iu A E OE TOOL 334 Required Equipment e ERE 334 How to make the E4991A Firmware Installation Disk llle 334 How to update the E4991A firmware o ooooooooro en ene e nent eens 335 D Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply sre reesen ei a R N TERRE RR ARR HAAR RRR T s 340 Power Requires e Ew RE 340 Power Cable seks soto dodo tut stab prts abge esie rostris br AE 340 Turning the Power ON and OFF e s 342 Tummg the power ON ocu vL Rs 342 Turning the power OFF iios uu AREE ERRARE EUR ERI ERES CERE PTS 342 E Messages Alphabetical Order cie oO PCI ue RR Ie Ra EROR BE bMS 344 A edu n cient Up oc des rra abe Aen rl IR ode tk 344 BA A e E 344 om EW AWK ANR ACZ 344 pre EZR EZ TRZE 346 RRC a Ma Ate ies ted Mid lA Rda 346 E A o OO OE 347 O T a A N E E E E 347 EEE E E HI E ETE EEE EE PE uri Ea BE Ne NN 347 A E bolt N E EE E E AE E 349 ING E RN 349 ORO CERZE A A 351 NR 351 A A RZE O REN 352 PA e let casita O 353 nes ene AS GE A EMILE DEM Rip One 353 e da a rof e e 354 DU ole acute n LA Elo lis ee 354 Messages indicating the internal status of the equipment 0 0 2c eee eee 356 Messages indic
104. the latest Manual Changes supplement The supplement for this manual is identified by this manual s printing data and is available from Agilent Technologies If the serial prefix or number of an instrument is lower than that on the title page of this manual see Appendix A Manual Changes For information concerning a serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page or in the Manual change supplement contact the nearest Agilent Technologies office 20 Chapter 1 General Information Required Equipment O 2 9 L 5 s S Required Equipment 2 Table lists the recommended equipment for performing maintenance on the E4991A Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Critical specifications Recommended Model Qty Use Frequency Counter Frequency 1 MHz to 3 GHz 53131 2A Opt 010 amp 0302 1 RA Accuracy lt 2 5 ppm or 53181A Opt 010 amp 030 Frequency Standard Frequency 10 MHz Time Base 5071A 1 A Error 1 107 9 year or 5061B Multimeter No substitute 3458A 1 PA Power Meter No Substitute 438A 1 PA E4418A B or E4419A B Power Sensor Frequency Range I MHz to 3 GHz 8482A 8481D 4 1 PA Power 35 dBm to 1 dBm E4412A 5 or E9304A 6 Network Analyzer Frequency 5 GHz to 6 GHz 8753ES Opt 006 1 F 8753ET Opt 006 or 8753E Opt 006 Performance Test Kit No Substitute 16190B I P or 16190A Opt 001 Calibration Kit No Substitute 16195B 7 1 P A F T 85031B 1
105. the local level on the A3 Source Board Required Equipment Nothing Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A3 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Make sure that nothing is connected to the E4991A Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant 134 Chapter 3 Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the gain of AGC on the A3 Source Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B furnished with E4991A 7mm N m Adapter 115254 Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A3 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 11 Figure 3 11 A3 AGC Gain Adjustment Setup E4991A sain PRI gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 7mm N m Adapter 50 Q Termination e4991ase016 Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant Chapter 3 135 Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment The purpose of t
106. to or destruction of part or all of the product Note denotes important information It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which is essential to highlight Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that 1ts calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institution s calibration facility or to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Documentation Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the separate agre
107. 0 MHz 20 dBm 0 63 W W 0 12 W 46 6 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 1 0 GHz 20 dBm Z 1 34 W W 0 23 W 30 2 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 6 GHz 20 dBm Z 4 39 W W 0 72 W 51 2 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 1 8 GHz 20 dBm 2 01 W W 0 29 W 60 6 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 2 0 GHz 20 dBm Z 1 38 W W 0 10 W 217 6 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 2 2 GHz 20 dBm Z 2 09 W W 0 23 W 120 7 mrad mrad 12 8 mrad 2 4 GHz 20 dBm 4 47 W W 0 64 W q 88 4 mrad mrad 12 5 mrad Chapter 2 109 mn 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 6 GHz 20 dBm z 15 4W W 2 2W q 102 6 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 3 0 GHz 20 dBm Z 7 1W w L1W q 95 4 mrad mrad 13 9 mrad 110 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 010 W W 0 002 W 125 4 mrad mrad 19 4 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 020 W W 0 005 w 23 3 mrad mrad 4 2 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 13 W W 0 03 W 12 5 mrad mrad 2 5 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 30 W W 0 07w 13 6 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 3
108. 0 mw mW 3 6 mW G 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 80 mw mW 15 mw y 200 MHz 3 dBm Z 130 mw mW 26 mW E 3 300 MHz 3 dBm Z 180 mw mW 31 mW 5 500 MHz 3 dBm Z 280 mW mW 51 mW 2 z 600 MHz 3 dBm Z 330 mw mW 51 mw v 800 MHz 3 dBm Z 430 mW mW 51 mW 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 530 mW mW 51 mw 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z 680 mW mW 101 mw 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 830 mW mW 101 mw 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 930 mW mW 101 mw 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1030 mw mW 201 mw 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z 1130 mw mW 201 mw 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 1230 mw mW 201 mw 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 1330 mw mW 201 mw 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 1430 mw mW 201 mw 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1530 mw mW 201 mw Chapter 2 91 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 50W Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 46 W w 0 09 w 9 2 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 46 W w 0 09 w q 9 3 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 53 W W 0 09 W 10 7 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 71 W W 0 11 W 14 2 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 78 W W 0 14w q 15 7 mrad mrad 2 7 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 93 W W 0 19 W 18 6 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm 1 11 W W 0 23 W 22 1 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 800 MHz 3 dBm 1 26 W W 0 23
109. 00 MHz 3 dBm 0 50 W W 0 11 W 13 7 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm Z 1 38 W W 0 31W 15 8 mrad mrad 3 5 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm Z 3 75 W W 0 77W 24 1 mrad mrad 5 0 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 2 32 W w 0 45W 27 0 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z 1 28 W W 0 19W 58 0 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 1 10W w 0 12w 101 6 mrad mrad 10 8 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 2 08 W W 0 31W 56 7 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 6 97 W W 0 91W 79 5 mrad mrad 10 4 mrad 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 14 38 W W 2 06 W 95 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 4 86 W W 0 74W q 88 5 mrad mrad 13 4 mrad Chapter 2 111 mn 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 2 65 W W 0 30 W q 120 6 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad 112 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 40 dBm Z 0 100 W W 0 010w 892 0 mrad mrad 68 1 mrad 10 MHz 40 dBm 0 110 W W 0 011 W 104 2 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 100 MHz 40 dBm Z 0
110. 180 if you want to check the mouse The floppy disk drive is used to save the E4991A setup state and measurement data in the floppy disk and to call them up It is compatible with a 3 5 inch 720KB or 1 44MB DOS format floppy disk Refer to To check the FDD on page 180 if you want to check the FDD The external color monitor is available to display the same information as the E4991A LCD Refer to To check the VGA Display Output on page 180 if you want to check the VGA Display Output The external trigger input terminal allows you to enter the trigger signal to command execution of measurement Refer to To check the External Keyboard on page 179 if you want to check the external trigger input You can use the LAN port to connect the E4991A to the LAN Refer to To check the LAN for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 on page 181 if you want to check the LAN A specified printer is available to print out the E4991 A measurement display setup display and others You can use it to connect the printer parallel port Refer to To check the Printer Parallel port for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 on page 188 if you want to check the printer parallel port R p o je o D 7 y O e e 3 Q It is available to build an automatic measurement by connecting the external controller and other equipment through GPIB connector Refer to To check the GPIB on page 188 if you want to check th
111. 2 23 36 Press Cal Compen to show the Cal Compen menu Select Cal Menu Uncal Select Cal Type User Freq amp Pwr Connect the OPEN Termination included in the 16195B to the 7 mm connector using the Torque Wrench p n 8710 1760 Select Meas Open to calibrate open termination Connect the SHORT Termination included in the 16195B to the 7 mm connector using the Torque Wrench p n 8710 1760 Select Meas Short to calibrate short termination Connect the 50 W Termination included in the 16195B to the 7 mm connector using the Torque Wrench p n 8710 1760 Select Meas Load to calibrate 50 W termination Select Done Press Save Recall to show the Save Recall softkey menu Select Save State Press 3 Enter then E4991A s status is saved to 3 sta status file Set Osc dBm to 20 and Avg to 1 for all measurement points as Figure 2 7 Chapter 2 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Segment Table 2 Power Level 20dBm Averaging 1 Trace Meas Format Scale Display Marker Stimulus Trigger Utility Save Recall System Avg jias Ly TE nt i Segment Table Add Segment Segment No LR s 7 aant Hz H 286 Stop Hz 2136 M S Wd d d m E m d b Number Of Points b fe Point Average TS Delete Segment lejlojojojo mim m u Ble ie le le le le le T en 2 e pur e 2 D n pue So 90UELIOHSd Z
112. 2 10 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test 63 Record the Z and q readings to the calculation sheet Ignore the reading at 1 3 GHz and 2 8 GHz 64 Calculate the test result according to the calculation sheet the record it to the performance test record 10 cm airline with SHORT Termination 65 Record the 16190B s 10 cm airline with SHORT termination calibration values on the calculation sheet 66 Connect the 16190B s 10 cm airline and short termination to the 7mm connector using the following procedure see Figure 2 10 a Remove the open termination from the airline b Gently inserts the airline center conductor into the short termination center conductor Mate the outer conductors Then torque the connection to 136 N cm using the Torque Wrench p n 8710 1760 A 1 2 inch open end wrench may be necessary to hold the airline stationary 10 cm Airline with SHORT Measurement Test Setup L g d Ua s Ua 67 Press Save Recall to show the Save Recall menu 68 Select Recall State 69 Select the file 0 sta 40 Chapter 2 NOTE NOTE Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test 70 Press Trigger to make a measurement 71 Record the Z and q readings to the calculation sheet Ignore the reading at 800 MHz 2 2 GHz and 3 0 GHz 72 Press Save Recall to show the Save Recall softkey menu 73 Select Recall Sta
113. 200MHz 3dBm Z W a CV79 mrad a CV80 300MHz 3dBm W a CV81 mrad a CV82 500 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV83 mrad a CV84 600 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV85 mrad a CV86 800 MHz 3dBm W a CV87 mrad a CV88 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV89 mrad a CV90 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV91 mrad a CV92 1 8 GHz 3 dBm W a CV93 mrad a CV94 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV95 mrad a CV96 22 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV97 mrad a CV98 2 4 GHz 3 dBm W a CV99 q mrad a CV100 Chapter 2 65 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 2 6 GHz 3 dBm pa W a CV101 q mrad a CV102 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Zi W a CV103 q mrad a CV104 66 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Airline with Open Averaging 1 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 1 MHz 20 dBm Z kW a CV73 mrad a CV74 A 10 MHz 20 dBm Z W a CV75 y RE mrad a CV76 2 3 100 MHz 20 dBm Z W a CV77 SA mrad a CV78 2 z 200MHz 20dBm Z W a CV79 v mrad a CV80 300MHz 20dBm Z W a CV81 mrad a CV82 500 MHz 20 dBm Z W a CV83 mrad a CV84 600MHz 20dBm Z W
114. 29 Adjustment Adjustment Program Figure 3 7 E4991A Info and Adjustment Conditions E49914 Info and Adjustment Conditions MODEL E4991A Serial Number and Option MainFrame L ITI Test Head M BG Calibration Kit TJ Options r 001 I abs F 002 Adjustment Conditions Adjusted By Customer Name I lj Date D Temperature ll DEGC Humidity bo gH Report Number il Comment iL QUIT PROGRAM Step 9 Adjustment Program Main Menu box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 8 For example click F1 AII Adjustment if you want to perform all adjustments Figure 3 8 Adjustment Program Main Menu Adjustment Program Main Menu F 1 All Adjustment F3 Spot Adjustment When the Spot Adjustment is selected in Main Menu Spot Adjustment Menu box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 9 Then select the corresponding adjustment according to Table 3 2 on page 124 130 Chapter 3 Adjustment Adjustment Program Figure 3 9 Spot Adjustment Menu Select Spat Adjustment Al Adjustment AS Adjustment Opt 1D5 A3 Adjustment 2 amp djustment Opt 01 Ad Adjustment Default Cal Adjustment i Cancel Information If you replace or adjust Al board perform Al Adjustment If you replace or adjust A3 board perform amp 3 Adjustment and 42 Adjustment Opt 001 If you replace or adjust 44 board perform A4 Adjustment and 42 Adjustment Opt 001 If you replace or adjust 42
115. 40 dBm Z Q 0 070 9 37 200 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 1 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q 8 85 300 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 31 Q 8 90 500 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 6 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 78 Q 7 98 600 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 5 1 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 45 Q 7 30 1 0 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 5 3 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 190 7 93 1 3 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 20 120 10 60 1 6 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 10 9 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 310 7 59 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 92 Q 8 44 2 0 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 10 5 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 2 06 Q 7 89 2 4 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 7 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 740 7 13 2 6 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 4 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 302 9 49 2 8 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Change 7 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of Frequency Accuracy Test Option 010 Page 102 to the following information and appended TAR to this report Frequency Accuracy Test Option 010 Without Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 10 Hz Hz 0 029 Hz 351 40 3 GHz 30 kHz kHz 0 085 kHz 354 90 With Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 1
116. 5 36 800 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 5 37 1 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 5 89 1 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 5 89 1 6 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 72 Q 6 14 1 6 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 6 16 1 8 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 29 Q 7 12 1 8 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 7 15 2 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 10 Q 14 99 2 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 15 19 22 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 9 41 2 2 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 12 8 mrad 9 46 2 4 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 64 Q 7 08 2 4 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 12 5 mrad 7 09 2 6 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 2 20 7 16 2 6 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 7 16 3 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 110 6 88 3 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 13 9 mrad 6 91 Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 002 Q 7 50 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 19 4 mrad 6 47 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 005 Q 5 63 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 2 mrad 5 60 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 03 Q 5 13 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 5 mrad 5 13 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 07 Q 4 63 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 4 62 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 11 Q 4 67 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 4 68 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 31Q 4 57 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 5 mrad 4 57 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 77 Q 4 92 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 0 mrad 4 9 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 450 5 20 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 5 22 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 19 Q0 6 98 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 7 01 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies
117. 50 0 3 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 3 04287 01270 1 REAR COVER I O 0515 0914 8 2 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 4 0515 1232 5 6 SCREW MACH M3 5 5 2950 0054 1 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 2190 0054 1 2 WSHR LK INTL T Chapter 6 271 p J D 9 D O D c D T D a n Figure 6 23 4287ase06008 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Side View Side View OS o OoO0595C 590595960 D eO LED Ca LECCE OO EE EE EX EX Ex gog0903050809090903000609090903050 OQ0D00620200000060600000000000630 IS o roo oooO aO CEO A03030Q0000006060023000000000060600 0000200606262900060606290900060000 od00000003080008000000080002080008 0908 OSO RO POSO ROO SOSA LORORO LOS 980808 0708080800080 SO O SOLOS RO 0905090909030509060002086809090909 OD0000000303000000030300000002000 2020202020202020 2020202020202009 0D6D60626000006060600060606062600 0900000000000606069 000000006000000 al JET 272 _ Chapter6 Replaceable Parts e gt Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later D ES D Table 6 24 Side View p z Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description 2 Desig S n 1 5041 9167 1 4 FOOT FL 1460 1345 5 2 WIREFORM 2 E5100 40002 0 4 STANDOFF 0515 1232 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 3 5041 9187 5 2 STRAP HANDL REAR 0515 0956
118. 6 mS mS 0 46 mS 100 MHz 3 dBm Y 17 6 mS mS 3 3 mS 200 MHz 3 dBm Y 31 4 mS mS 6 5 mS 300 MHz 3 dBm Y 44 7 mS mS 9 8 mS 500 MHz 3 dBm Y 72 mS mS 17 mS 600 MHz 3 dBm Y 95 mS mS 21 mS 800 MHz 3 dBm Y 127 mS mS 28 mS 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 161 mS mS 35 mS 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y 284 mS mS 46 mS 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y 362 mS mS 61 mS 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y 420 mS mS 69 mS 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 689 mS mS 126 mS 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y 781 mS mS 140 mS 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y 881 mS mS 155 mS 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y 991 mS mS 171 mS 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y 1111 mS mS 186 mS 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 1244 mS mS 203 mS Chapter 2 103 mn 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 13 5 mw mW 2 6 mW 10 MHz 3 dBm Z 18 0 mw mW 3 6 mW 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 63 mW mW 15 mw 200 MHz 3 dBm Z 113 mw mW 26 mw 300 MHz 3 dBm Z 163 mw mW 31 mw 500 MHz 3 dBm Z 263 mW mW 51 mw 600 MHz 3 dBm Z 313 mw mW 51 mw 800 MHz 3 dBm Z 413 mw mW 51 mw 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 513 mw mW 51 mw 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z 663 mW mW 101 mw 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 813 mw mW 101 mw 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 913 mw mW 101 mw 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1013 mw mW 201
119. 8 2 SCREW 4 5063 9209 8 2 STRAP HANDLE 5 E4991 60002 7 1 COVER ASSY 6 5041 9186 4 2 STRAP HANDLE FRT 0515 0956 8 2 SCREW 7 0515 2079 0 6 SCREW M4X8 8 5022 1190 4 l FRONT FRAME221 5 8160 0641 3 210cm GASKET BRAID 9 5041 9173 9 2 SIDE TRIM 221 5 Chapter 6 273 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Test Head Figure 6 24 Test Head e4991ase029 274 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Table 6 25 Test Head Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 04001 8 1 COVER TOP 2 E4991 60111 9 1 TEST HEAD 0515 0914 8 5 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 E4991 04002 9 1 COVER BOTTOM 0515 0914 8 6 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 0403 0800 4 4 FOOT 4 1250 2468 0 3 RF CONNECTOR N SMA 0515 0914 9 8 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 5 E4991 20063 6 1 HOUSING 0515 1006 1 4 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 6 E4991 25101 3 2 CUSHION 7 E4991 00601 6 1 PLATE 8 E4991 61601 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY 9 E4991 61602 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY 10 E499 1 61603 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY Chapter 6 275 p J D 9 D O D c D T D a n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit Figure 6 25 Replaceable Parts of the Option 007 Test Kit e4991u opt00703 276 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix
120. 8 87 1 8 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 31 Q 7 32 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 92 Q 8 20 2 0 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 10 4 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 2 06 Q 7 65 2 4 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 74 Q 6 98 2 6 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 4 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 300 9 23 2 8 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 7 mrad 8 87 O Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Change 4 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of DC Bias Test Option 001 Page 88 to the following information and appended TAR to this report DC Bias Test Option 001 RY Measurement TAR Bias Level Test Limit Test Result Uncertainty 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 99 mV 46 50 4V 10 00 mV UV 57 3 uV 174 60 U Y 6 00 mV UV 27 8 uV 216 90 4V 10 00 mV UV 48 6 uV 205 80 40 V 46 00 mV mV 0 98 mV 47 39 50 mA 120 0 pA HA 9 4 uA 12 86 4mA 28 0 pA HA 1 1 2 uA 24 11 100 pA 20 2 uA HA 1 1 0pA 21 07 100 uA 20 2 pA HA 1 1 2 pA 17 44 4mA 28 0 pA HA 1 2 nA 24 48 50 mA 120 0 pA HA 9 1 pA 13 28 Change 5 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of OSC Level Accuracy Test Option 007 Page 89 to the following information and appended TAR to this report OSC Level Accuracy Test Option 007 Power Level Frequency Test
121. 8 mrad 10 47 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 24 Q 11 32 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 11 49 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 00 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 1 mrad 8 01 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 20 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 21 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 58 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 1 mrad 8 59 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 0 51 Q 8 84 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 84 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 53 Q 8 79 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 9 08 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 53 Q 9 07 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 9 mrad 8 83 Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 254 Q 10 13 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 17 6 mrad 6 71 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q t43Q0 10 03 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 0 mrad 9 94 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 42 Q 3 22 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 0 mrad 5 27 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 22 Q 5 47 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 5 50 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 16 Q 4 96 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 6 mrad 5 01 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 61 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 5 67 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 12 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 5 17 800 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q 5 02 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 5 03 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 5 50 1 0 GH
122. 87 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 07 Q 5 62 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 11Q 5 61 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 31Q 5 36 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 5 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 77 5 15 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 0 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 46 Q 5 31 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 19Q 7 10 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q 9 55 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 9 mrad 8 87 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 31Q 6 89 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 91 Q 7 77 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 4 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 2 07 Q 7 06 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 74 Q 6 69 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 4 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 300 8 99 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 007 Q 23 42 1 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 89 7 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 008 Q 21 07 10 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 7 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 04 Q 11 23 100 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 2 7 mrad 8 87 200 MHz
123. 87 66511 5 1 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR 04287 69511 1 1 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR Exchange 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 13 04287 61011 8 1 FAN ASSY 0515 1666 9 4 SCREW M4X35 POZI Chapter 6 243 D ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i m n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Front Panel Figure 6 6 Front Panel e4991ase030 244 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 6 Front Panel Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 5182 7594 2 1 KNOB 2 E4991 00201 1 FRONT PANEL 3 E4991 00202 3 1 SUB PANEL 4 E5100 40001 9 1 FRONT BEZEL 5 04287 40004 7 1 GUIDE FOR CURSOR KEY 6 E4991 25002 3 1 RUBBER KEY CURSOR 7 E4991 25001 2 1 RUBBER KEY 8 E4991 66522 8 1 FRONT KEYBOARD 9 04287 40001 4 1 FRONT BEZEL 10 04287 25003 4 1 OPTICAL FILTER 11 2090 0396 0 1 LCD DISPLAY 04287 25004 5 1 GASKET 12 5022 1190 4 1 FRONT FRAME 13 0371 3953 5 1 KEY CAP 14 04287 01212 7 1 BRACKET SW 0515 0999 9 2 SCREW M2 5X0 45 L 6 FL 15 04287 61901 7 1 WIRE ASSY WITH SWITCH Chapter 6 245 D ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i m n Figure 6 7 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Front Panel Back Side Front Panel Back Side
124. A21 Analog Interface Board and EEPROM Removal A24 GPIB board as described in A24 GPIB A25 LAN Board Removal for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 e A25 LAN board as described in A24 GPIB A25 LAN Board Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 e A26 Display board as described in A26 Display Board Removal Remove seven screws fastening the A20 to the bottom panel and remove the A20 Remove the CPU and CPU fan as described in CPU Replacement for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 Remove the DIMM64MB modules as described in DIMM64MB Memory Module Replacement for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 To replace the A20 reverse the above procedure And configure the several jumpers and BIOS parameters as described in To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 on page 197 292 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Torx screwdriver T15 Procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable if they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal N Az D o D O O 3 O T T
125. AR Level Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 0 4 17 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 4 26 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 O 5 09 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0110 5 30 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 20 140 4 92 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 7 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 190 4 44 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 0 4 70 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 800 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 230 5 37 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 230 5 99 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 240 9 60 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 7 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 240 10 43 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 8 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 24 Q 11 32 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 00 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 1 mrad 8 87 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 20 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51Q 8 58 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 1 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51Q 8 84 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 53 0 8 79 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 87 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 53 Q 9 07 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 9 mrad 8 87 O Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 8
126. Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the IF Gain in the A4 Receiver Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B furnished with E4991A Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A4 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 14 Figure 3 14 A4 IF Gain Adjustment Setup hi 50 9 Termination 4 Test Head e4991ase009 Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant 140 Chapter 3 Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to keep the default of the coefficient of calibration Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B furnished with E4991A Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the Default Cal Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Default Cal Coefficient Adjus
127. Agilent E4991A RF IMPEDANCE MATERIAL ANALYZER Service Manual Manual Change Agilent Part No N A May 2009 Change 1 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of Frequency Accuracy Test Page 74 to the following information and appended TAR to this report Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 10 Hz Hz 0 491 Hz 20 4 3 GHz 30 kHz kHz 0 369 kHz 81 5 With Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 1 Hz Hz 0 003 Hz 3931 3 GHz 3 kHz kHz 0 008 kHz 3859 Change 2 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of OSC Level Accuracy Test Page 74 to 75 to the following information and appended TAR to this report OSC Level Accuracy Test Power Level Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 dBm 1 GHz 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 9 44 0 dBm 3 GHz 3 00 dB dB 0 35 dB 8 72 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 3 00 dB dB 0 35 dB 8 62 10 dBm 300 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 26 dB 7 88 15 dBm 1 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 9 4 20 dBm 50 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 8 57 25 dBm 1 GHz 2 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 8 57 30 dBm 10 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 9 38 35 dBm 2 GHz 3 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 12 69 40 dBm 100 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 27 dB 7 63 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Change 3 Change the
128. Appendix E Messages The E4991A can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the internal operating status of the equipment This appendix explains what these messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order Chapter 1 19 0 D D Fej W 2 e 5y 3 D O 2 Figure 1 1 General Information Instrument Covered by This Manual Instrument Covered by This Manual Agilent Technologies uses a two part ten character serial number label See Figure 1 1 attached to the instrument s rear panel The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Serial Number Label Example Agilent Technologies Made In Malaysia E4991A MY12345678 24991 aoj6001 An instrument manufactured after the printing date of this manual may have serial number prefix that is not listed on the title page This unlisted serial number prefix indicates the instrument is different from those described in this manual The manual for this new instrument may be accompanied by a yellow Manual Changes supplement or have a different manual part number This sheet contains change information that explains how to adapt the manual to the newer instrument In addition to change information the supplement may contain information for correcting errors Errata in the manual To keep this manual as current and accurate as possible Agilent Technologies recommends that you periodically request
129. Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY433 and later Figure 4 14 represents the booting process flow in the E4991A If the E4991A stops in the booting process troubleshoot using the following step by step procedure Figure 4 14 Booting process flowchart Splash Screen F2 Key Pressed BIOS Setup Menu 2 Windows Boot Screens No Did it Shutdown Propery Last Time Scan Disk Check Revision and Option Information Display E4991A Measurement View E4991A Power On Self Test 4 i e4991ase090 168 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY433 and later Step 1 Splash Screen The splash screen is displayed with Agilent logo as shown in Figure 4 15 If the splash screen is displayed you can assume that the A20 digital motherboard is functioning correctly NOTE While the splash screen is displayed if you want to run the BIOS setup utility push F2 key as soon as in the screen Figure 4 15 Splash Screen Agilent Technologies e506 lasel4g Step 2 Windows boot screens The Windows boot screens are displayed The Windows boot screens consists of two screens Each screen is displayed in the order as shown in Figure 4 15 If the Windows boot screens are displayed it is assumed that the A27 HDD works While the Window screens are displayed Windows operating system is starting up R 4o p o
130. C Bias Current Adjustment Opt 001 only aaa eee eens 145 Required Equipments s i A quist esie eee a duds 145 POC UA se ACA tedio 145 A2 DC Bias Output Resistor Conductance Adjustment Opt 001 onv annaa naaa 146 Required Equipment 202 50 stu t ec eee tae de ere ee RUP end sp DH ERR 146 Proced te eos xen rx piel wie A Ree RUP QE es dei Ee 146 Writing the Instrument IB ose Sogo sees OT et On nivem nn vines 148 Required Equipment A ii o ed ee sa 148 PTOCEdUTE 14 690 dA a o tester 148 Contents How to confirm the E4991A option installed 148 System Backup for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 0 cece eee 149 How to make a system backup diS 149 System backup Proced ure ii A Oe SS ee VIS 149 4 Troubleshooting THtrOdUCH ON or verses IS SENT IS ees 154 How to exit from the E4991A Measurement View 0 ccc cece tte t tenes 155 To Troubleshoot the Instrument 0 e nent iii 156 Primary Trouble Isolation 1 0 0 0 e K g K RRR RR cn ai A 156 No Display Troubleshooting a 158 Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 161 Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY433 and later 168 Troubleshooting Using Internal Test n 172 Power On Self Testi TRE DDR eS YO E EDT ER SE RUD etg 172 PLI unlock e RR PESE EPA NURSE aid 172 To Executethe Internal Test 2 ony consue noto des td Sueca ru edens 172 Internal Tests reeni
131. During setting the numbers of segments or measurement points should not exceed the maximum figures Too much data This occurs when the amount of data exceeds the E4991 A s memory capacity even though the program data received in a block expression or character string conforms to the standard The occurrence of this error indicates that the problem is restricted to the memory or memory related devices Trigger ignored The trigger command TRG or an external trigger signal has been received and detected by the E4991A but was ignored because of the timing for example the E4991A trigger was not in the waiting condition Prepare for the trigger command or external trigger signal when the trigger is in the waiting condition U Undefined header A command not defined by the E49914 has been received although grammatical structure 354 Appendix E 15 Messages User cal mode only does not provide any problem For example when the program message DISP TRAC1 X AUTO has been sent instead of the correct program message DISP TRAC1 Y AUTO it is received by the E4991A as an undefined command Refer to the command reference and check the correct commands User cal mode only Setting has been attempted by using commands to define each standard of the calibration kit before selecting a user defined calibration kit First select the calibration kit that will be used as the user defined calibration kit Then define each standard va
132. E ASSY 3 E499 1 66510 4 1 ANALOG MOTHER 0515 1550 0 10 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 4 1821 4776 8 1 CPU IC K6 3160 0938 6 1 FAN 5183 4063 6 1 THERMAL CMD 5184 4049 0 1 CLAMP 04287 61622 9 1 WIRE ASSY 5 04287 01213 8 1 COVER 0515 1550 0 1 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 0515 0914 8 3 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 6 1400 1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE 7 1400 1334 6 1 CLAMP CABLE Chapter 6 241 Figure 6 5 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables e4991ase026 242 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 5 Front View Analog Boards and Semi Rigid Cables Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 04287 66554 6 1 A4 RECEIVER BOARD 04287 69554 2 1 A4 RECEIVER BOARD Exchange 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 0515 0924 0 4 SCREW M3X0 5 2 04287 61601 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY 3 E4991 65001 6 1 N CONNECTOR ASSY 4 E4991 66502 4 1 A2 DC BIAS BOARS Opt 001 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 5 04287 61603 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY SRGD 6 9170 1468 6 8 CORE TROID 1400 0249 0 2 CABLE TIE 7 04287 61604 7 1 RF CABLE ASSY 8 04287 61605 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY 9 04287 61606 9 1 RF CABLE ASSY 10 04287 61602 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY 11 E4991 66553 5 1 A3 SOURCE BOARD E4991 69553 1 1 SOURCE BOARD Exchange 0515 1550 0 2 SCREW M3 L 8 P H 12 042
133. G CAUTION NOTE Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained in operational condition Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings such as the example below precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed Dangerous voltage levels capable of causing death are present in this instrument Use extreme caution when handling testing and adjusting this instrument Do not connect the measuring terminals to mains Safety Symbol General definitions of safety symbols used on the instrument or in manuals are listed below Instruction Manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instrument manual Alternating current Direct current On Supply Off Supply In position of push button switch Out position of push button switch Frame or chassis terminal A connection to the frame chassis of the equipment which normally include all exposed metal structure This warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or death to personnel This Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice condition or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage
134. Hz 20 dBm Z 7 1W W 11W q 95 4 mrad mrad 13 9 mrad Chapter 2 83 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 010 W W 0 002 w 125 4 mrad mrad 19 4 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 020 W w 0 005 Ww q 23 3 mrad mrad 4 2 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 13 W W 0 03 W 12 5 mrad mrad 2 5 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 30 W w 0 07 W 13 6 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 50 W W 0 11W q 13 7 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm 1 38 W W 0 31 W 15 8 mrad mrad 3 5 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm 3 75 W W 0 77W 24 1 mrad mrad 5 0 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 2 32 W W 0 45W q 27 0 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 1 28 W W 0 19w 58 0 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 1 10 W w 0 12 W 101 6 mrad mrad 10 8 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 2 08 W W 0 31 W q 56 7 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 6 97 W W 0 91 W 79 5 mrad mrad 10 4 mrad 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 14 38 W W 2 06 W 95 1 mrad mrad 13 6 mrad 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 4 86 W W 0 74 W q 88 5 mrad mrad 13 4 mrad 84 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record
135. Hz 20 dBm Z Q 20 170 6 67 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 300 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 6 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 7 06 500 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 3 8 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 78 600 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 8 87 800 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q 5 50 800 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 8 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 6 01 1 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 72 Q 6 26 1 6 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 29 Q 7 19 1 8 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 10Q 14 90 2 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 14 3 mrad 8 87 2 2 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 9 54 2 2 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 12 8 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 64 7 13 2 4 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 12 6 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 220 7 24 2 6 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 8 87 3 0 GHz 20 dBm Z Q 241 10 6 94 3 0 GHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 13 9 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 002 Q 16 85 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 27 2 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 005 Q 9 80 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 4 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 03 Q 6 41 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 5 mrad 8
136. Hz Hz 0 003 Hz 4101 90 3 GHz 3 kHz kHz 0 008 kHz 3822 90 Change 8 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of OSC Level Accuracy Test Option 010 Page 102 to the following information and appended TAR to this report Power Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement TAR Level Uncertainty 1 dBm 1 GHz 3 50 dB dB 0 22 dB 16 51 0 dBm 3 GHz 5 60 dB dB 0 35 dB 16 28 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 5 60 dB dB 0 35 dB 16 08 10 dBm 300 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 26 dB 13 79 15 dBm 1 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 22 dB 16 44 20 dBm 50 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 24 dB 14 99 25 dBm 1 GHz 3 50 dB dB 0 24 dB 14 99 30 dBm 10 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 22 dB 16 42 35 dBm 2 GHz 5 60 dB dB 0 24 dB 23 68 40 dBm 100 MHz 3 50 dB dB 0 27 dB 13 35 Change 9 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Option 010 Page 103 to 114 to the following information and appended TAR to this report Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Option 010 Standard Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Level Uncertainty MHz 3 dBm Y us 0 61 uS 8 42 10 MHz 3 dBm Y us 046uS 13 61 100 MHz 3 dBm Y us 3 3 uS 5 45 200 MHz 3 dBm Y US 6 5 uS 4 85 300
137. I O configuration Click here Click here e4991ase128 Click START on the Agilent VEE Screen as shown in Figure 3 5 128 Chapter 3 Adjustment Adjustment Program gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Figure 3 5 Agilent VEE Screen Serial No ADJUSTMENT NAME Option ADJUSTMENTNAME JUDGE DATE TIME EE R STEP MODE Program E4991A Adjustment Program Revision No A 00 99 Date 00t 12 2001 Copyright c 2001 Agilent Technologies All Rights Reserved Step 7 ETE Configuration box is displayed as show in Figure 3 6 Select the model number and the serial number of the equipment and set its GPIB address In File Folder Setting enter the path the Adjustment Program installed Click Next when you complete the settings Figure 3 6 ETE Configuration Equipment Setting E Frequency Standard mici gs 1 Model Name 50714 Digital Multimeter 3458A Serial Nunber GP IB Address 22 Serial Huber Frequency Counter 531814 GP IB Address D3 Sri Nae cat sei Number Power Sensor 5 mE ATA Power Meter E4419B y Serial Number 9 i Home Directory eraaje4991a Step 8 E4991A Info and Adjustment Conditions box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 7 Input the E4991A serial number option and the test conditions Generally use the 16195B Calibration Kit which is a furnished accessory for the E4991A Click Next when you complete the settings Chapter 3 1
138. J System devices Universal serial bus controller EEE E E E Properties Refresh Remove Print 176 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Figure 4 19 Example of no device driver file in system System Properties ax General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance View devices by type View devices by connection H Disk drives m Display adapters Floppy disk controllers Hard disk controllers WB HP B Interfaces 3 Keyboard Monitors B H H H H V De A E C 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI Tx NIC 3C805B T4D A analog que BUS 6 4 Ports COM amp LPT H System devices El Universal serial bus controller Properties Refresh Remove Print Cancel To check the Device Driver for serial prefix MY433 and later Make sure first whether the E4991A device drivers are installed properly or not by the following procedure if you experience the E4991A function doesn t work Step 1 Exit from the E4991A Measurement Display as shown in How to exit from the E4991A Measurement View on page 155 Then windows desktop screen is displayed Step 2 Click My Computer with the right button and select Properties as shown in Figure 4 20 Then the System Properties Figure 4 21 will appear Figure 4 20 Opening System Property Window Open Explore Search Manage Map Network Drive Disconnect Network Drive Crea
139. JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 on page 197 Inspect the Booting Process A21 Analog Interface Board Not Required Inspect the Booting Process To check the Front Panel on page 179 To check the External Trigger Input on page 181 309 Qo v o n T pu ol o m v x e O e o mi n Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 8 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC A22 Front Panel Not Required To Execute the External Test on page 189 mee To check the Front Panel on page 179 A24 GPIB Board Not Required To check the GPIB on page 188 A25 LAN Interface Not Required To check the LAN for serial prefix JP1KH Board JP2KH and MY432 on page 181 A26 Display Board Not Required Inspect the Booting Process To Execute the External Test on page 189 To check the VGA Display Output on page 180 A27 Mass Storage All Adjustments Inspect the Booting Process pue Syste Backup Perform the all Performance Tests A28 FDD Not Required To check the FDD on page 180 A50 Power Supply Not Required Inspect the Booting Process Assembly A51 LCD Not Required Inspect the Booting Process To Execute the External Test on page 189 To check the LCD on page 179 A52 Inverter Board Not Required Inspect the Booting Process To E
140. K6 2 400MHz microprocessor as shown in Table 4 5 to Table 4 12 Figure 4 34 shows the A20 digital motherboard jumpers location JP1 1 2 2 3 OFF ON JP2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF OFF OFF JP3 CPU Speed AMD K6 2E 400MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF OFF JP4 BUS Clock 66 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF ON JP7 BIOS Write Protect Non Writable 1 2 2 3 ON OFF JP9 CMOS Reset Normal 1 2 2 3 ON OFF JP10 CPU Voltage Selection 2 2V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF ON OFF OFF JP11 Power On Select 1 2 2 3 ON 198 OFF Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 NOTE If the jumper settings especially jumper 3 4 or 10 is incorrect there is a possibility that it gives damage to the microprocessor You must be attentive to configure the jumpers Figure 4 34 A20 Digital Motherboard Jumpers Location R 4o p o o D 7 y je o e 3 Q e4991ase031 Chapter 4 199 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options Generally BIOS Basic Input Output
141. LCD side to the FDD folder N Az D o D O O 3 O T T O je o p o Remove four screws fastening the FDD folder to FDD Remove the FDD from the FDD folder Disconnect the mylar ribbon cable item 5 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 at the FDD The mylar ribbon cable and their connector are fragile You must be attentive as described in NOTE on page 303 when you are instructed to disconnect or connect it Chapter 7 291 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 NOTE Replacement Procedure A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Torx screwdriver T15 Procedure Remove the mouse the external keyboard and the parallel printer cable 1f they are connected to the rear panel Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the power supply as described in A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 Disconnect the following cables e A20 to A26 Display board IDE1 flat cable item 1 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 e A20 to A26 Display board floppy flat cable item 2 in Figure 6 2 e A20 to A10 Analog Motherboard power supply cable item 3 in Figure 6 2 Remove the following boards e A21 Analog Interface board as described in
142. MY433 and later Table 6 26 Replaceable Pats of the Option 007 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 61610 5 1 CABLE ASSY HEAT RESISTANT 2 E4991 01220 7 1 HOLDER CABLE 3 E4991 01221 8 1 HOLDER CABLE 4 0515 0372 2 4 SCREW MACH M3X8 TORX T10 PAN 5 0515 1946 8 4 SCREW MACH M3X6 TORX T10 90 DEG FLAT 6 E4991 60005 0 1 STAND TEST FIXTURE 7 04287 61651 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY EXTENSION 8 E4991 60006 1 1 STAND TEST HEAD 9 E4991 60032 3 1 TERMINATION OPEN 10 E4991 60031 2 1 TERMINATION SHORT 11 E4991 60060 T 1 CASE TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION SET 12 1250 2879 7 3 ADAPTER N M SMA F 13 1250 3157 6 3 ADAPTER N F SMA F 14 04291 09001 4 1 PAD 15 E4991 18001 7 1 DISK FLOPPY TEMP CHARAC TEST SOFTWARE 16 1400 0584 6 3 TIE CABLE Chapter 6 277 2 J D 9 D O D c D T D Figure 6 26 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Test Head for Option 010 Test Head for Option 010 J EEE a Q P 7 3 e4991ase4002 Table 6 27 Test Head for Option 010 Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 60111 9 1 TEST HEAD 2 E4991 01210 5 1 ANGLE 3 04287 61651 4 1 EXTENSION CABLE ASSY 278 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Floppy
143. Main Advanced Security Power Boot Exi it After Power Failure Power On Item Specific Help Power Button Function Power Off Power Savings Disabled Standby Timeout off Suspend Timeout lof F1 Help 11 Select Item i Change Values F9 Setup Defaults ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub F10 Save and Exit Menu e4991ase3002 Save amp Exit Setup When you want to change and save a BIOS option Select Exit using keys at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu and press key Select Save CMOS to Flash using and press key Then select Exit Saving Changes using and press key A message of Save configuration change and exit now is displayed Select Yes using and press key The BIOS setup utility is closed after the current settings are saved Exit Without Saving If you cancel the changes in the BIOS option settings select Exit Discarding Changes using keys at the Exit Menu and press key The BIOS setup utility is closed without saving the current settings S 4 p e el o 4 0 3 e e 2 Chapter 4 217 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later 218 Chapter 4 Theory of Operation This chapter provides the theory of operation of the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer e 2 D je es lt o 9 oO 5 O ien e O 2 219 Figure 5 1 Lost1001 Theory of Operation
144. Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later Procedure to create the user backup image This section describes how to create the user backup image The C drive contents saved in this creation are recalled when the user recovery function is executed NOTE This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is IG201 or higher NOTE You need the keyboard for this operation Step 1 Shut down the E4991A Step 2 Connect the keyboard to the E4991A Step 3 Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E4991A Step 4 Press the standby switch of the E4991A to turn it on Step 5 When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold of the keyboard until this screen disappears Agilent Technologies starting bl 2L n je e5061buj034 NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor gt N y D n GD e pm e Q o JO uonej ejsu ueis S g Appendix B 323 System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later Step 6 The following screen appears Select Removable Devices with of t
145. N is displayed press YJ on the keyboard If you want to quit the system recovery press to start up the E4991A as usual Appendix B 317 gt N y D n GD e pm e Q D JO UO e e su ueis S g Step 6 Step 7 CAUTION Step 8 System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 The following message appears This is the final confirmation message asking whether you want to start the system recover Press on the keyboard to start the system recovery If you want to quit the system recovery press to start up the E4991A as usual This process will recover the system drive C of this instrument to the factory shipment state It takes about 10 minutes Please refer to the Operation Manual for more information This is the last chance to quit the recovery process Continue Y N The system recovery will be completed in about 10 minutes The following message is displayed during the system recovery System recovery in progress It takes about 10 minutes Please DO NOT TURN THE POWER OFF DURING THIS TIME Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause serious damage to the E4991A When the system recovery is completed the following message appears below the above message indicating that the system recovery is in progress Recovery Completed Please any key and then restart system Now the sys
146. O je o p o Remove the power supply as described in A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later Disconnect the following cables e A26 to A20 Digital Motherboard floppy flat cable item 1 in Figure 6 16 on page 260 e A26 to A20 IDEI flat cable item 2 in Figure 6 16 A26to LCD mylar ribbon cable item 4 in Figure 6 16 e A26 to Floppy mylar ribbon cable item 7 in Figure 6 16 e A26 to A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive flat cable item 8 in Figure 6 16 A26 to Backlight primary cable item 9 in Figure 6 16 A21 to the A10 Analog Motherboard flat cable item 3 in Figure 6 16 e A21 to the A22 Front Panel Keyboard flat cable item 10 in Figure 6 16 A2 to the system fan cables Remove the following boards e A21 Analog Interface board as described in A21 Analog Interface Board and EEPROM Removal A24 GPIB board as described 1n A24 GPIB Card Replacement for serial prefix MY433 and later e A26 Display board as described in A26 Display Board Removal Remove five screws fastening the A20 to the bottom panel and remove the A20 To replace the A20 reverse the above procedure And configure the several jumpers and BIOS parameters as described in To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later on page 210 Chapter 7 293 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Procedure C
147. Overall Instrument Operation Overall Instrument Operation The E4991A consists of a mainframe a test head and a calibration kit as shown in Figure 5 1 The mainframe includes a signal source a receiver a digital control and a power supply section The signal source generates a stimulus signal in the frequency range from 1 MHz to 3 GHz The stimulus signal goes through the test head and the test fixture to the device under test DUT The test head detects the voltage across the DUT and the current through the DUT and transfers the detected signals to the receiver section The receiver converts the analog signals to a digital data and forwards it to the digital control section The calibration kit is used to calibrate the E4991A system Calibration ensures the impedance measurement accuracy at the measurement terminal of the test head The power supply in the mainframe supplies all necessary dc power for the E4991A DUT Test Fixture Calibration Kit Measurement Terminal Ki Mainframe Test Head Digital Source Receiver Display Display Power Supply Connection between each assembly in the mainframe is shown in Figure 5 2 system block diagram 220 Chapter 5 Theory of Operation Overall Instrument Operation System Block Diagram for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 Figure 5 2 iddns amod Bulyoms OGY 18Mod
148. PCI VGA PCI IDE BusMaster OffBoard PCI IDE Card OffBoard PCI IDE Primary IRQ OffBoard PCI IDE Secondary IRQ PCI Sloti IRQ Priority PCI Slot2 IRQ Priority PCI Slot3 IRQ Priority PCI Slot4 IRQ Priority DMA Channel 8 DMA Channel 1 DMA Channel 3 DMA Channel 5 DMA Channel 6 DMA Channel 7 t TRQ3 ESC Exit f4 Sel To PgUp PgDn Mod i fy F2 F3 Color IRQ TRQS IRQ18 IRQ11 IRQ12 IRQ14 IRQ15 ESC Exit Sel Reserved Memory Size PgUp PgDn Modify Reserved Memory Address c8888 F2 F3 Color 206 Chapter 4 Figure 4 41 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Peripheral Setup Peripheral Setup options are displayed by choosing Peripheral Setup using gt fl keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 41 is displayed Compare the default BIOS options as shown in Figure 4 41 with your E4991A s BIOS options If there is difference change BIOS option using gt fl keys PageUp key and PageDown key If you want to exit from this page and go to main menu hit ESC key PERIPHERAL SETUP Page AMIBIOS SETUP PERIPHERAL SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Available Options t OnBoard Serial Porti OnBoard Serial Port2 Serial Port2 Mode IR Transmission Mode Receiver Polarity Transmitter Polarity OnBoard Parallel Port Parallel Port Mode EPP Version Para
149. PU Replacement for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 CPU Replacement for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 There is a CPU on the A20 Digital Motherboard Tools Required Flat edge screwdriver Procedure Always handle the CPU by the edges never touch the pins Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the power supply as described in A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 Disconnect the CPU fan cable from J16 CPU fan connector Separate the heatsink clip from the CPU socket tabs using the flat edge screwdriver Pull the CPU socket release lever laterally away from the CPU socket to disengage the level from the locking tab Then rotate the lever upward to release the CPU from the CPU socket Lift the CPU out of the socket To replace the CPU reverse the CPU removal procedure Install the CPU so that pin 1 on the CPU aligns with pin 1 ofthe CPT socket as shown in Figure 7 5 The diagonal notch on the CPU represents pin 1 294 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure CPU Replacement for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Figure 7 5 CPU Socket Alignment SETI 0 0 0 0 0 00 000000 0 00 N Az D o D O O 3 O T T O je o p o 4287ase07005 Chapter 7 295 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Replacement Procedure DIMM64MB Memory M
150. Rata IE m x More Ready Bias OFF Uncal Comp OFF Ava 1 ExtRef 24 Perform OPEN SHORT LOAD calibration as described in step 10 to 19 25 Press Save Recall to show the Save Recall softkey menu 26 Select Save State 27 Press 2 0 Enter then E4991A s status is saved to 20 sta status file 28 Set OSC dBm to 40 and Avg to 1 for all measurement point as Figure 2 8 Segment Table 3 Power Level 40dBm Averaging 1 Trace 1 E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer E4991A1 2 Trace Meas Format Scale Display Marker Stimulus Trigger Utility Save Recal System Segment Table Add Segment M M 1 P Segment No M a 9 M s Start H H a 2 86 G x j D a G c Stop Hz d 3G G G T G G Number Of Points H 3 4 Point Average Delete Segment More Ready Bias OFF Uncal Comp OFF Avg 1 ExtRef s 29 Perform OPEN SHORT LOAD calibration as described in step 10 to 19 Chapter 2 37 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test 30 Press Save Recall to show the Save Recall softkey menu 31 Select Save State 32 Press 4 0 Enter then E4991 A s status is saved to 40 sta status file OPEN Termination 33 Record the 16190B s OPEN termination calibration values on the calculation sheet 34 Connect the 16190B s OPEN termination to the 7mm connector 35 Press Save Recall to show th
151. Removal Front Panel Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium Flat edge screwdriver Procedure Step 1 Remove the top trim with a flat edge driver Step 2 Remove the nine screws item and 2 in Figure 7 1 from the top and bottom side of the front frame N J D RSA D O O 3 O T T O je o p o Figure 7 1 Screws fastening Front Panel Top View e4991ase050 Step 3 Gradually pull the front panel assembly towards the front by holding knob Chapter 7 287 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 7 2 Replacement Procedure A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Disconnect the cables item 9 and 10 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 connected to the
152. Section Analog Block Diagram 4 Figure 5 Urgpo 5050 Fr LAO i T at i A UI 000 i ot03dO UT ejqe o UDAM d 1050 xewijurgp 1 ZHDE p ZHINI LLAOd uui A i HOH 1591 ov Sojewy O Ty Sonn serg JOJO 5 0SUIEPO ZHOE MIS E 5 OSTIAPO ZHINT Rune urn N INO TA uorjeoo jueursnfpe sejeorpur STU Q erxe 09 A gt dPOG dPOL APO dais gps dpr 010 ZHIAOOOE gt OSOZ as R ZHING 6L9Z INO9TZ E Q U Q O ZHIN6 66C NOV LT 1 ZHNW66t LT I gt ISo Sopeuy days gps APSE 01 0 ory u nonp gt av dsa zv 0 ZH S ZI JH ZHY00T eey Surjdureg days aps APSE 01 0 dsd Tcv 01 Ty ug ZHWOD 3501 DAY IMN p V i i cardo MAN OF PV EV MO JOU TI 9 ZHINOT gz isis sarao ZHINvOEC 1pueg ZHDFOCZ indu 474 LXA ZHIAS 86 ISTI YE zpueq ZHIN 0T UI Jet KA 10JEJTOSQ 9dUdIAFAY LV e4991ase011 Chapter 5 226 Table 5 1 Theory of Operation Analog Section A1 Reference Oscillator Board Al reference oscillator board provides reference frequencies of RF1 RF2 Int Ref Out and 10 MHz reference for A3 and A4 The RF1 is supplied to A3 source board for local signal that will be supplied to A4 finally and its frequency depends on measurement frequency as shown in Table 5 1 The signal level of the RF1 is 6 dBm typically The RF2 is supplied to A3 for producing the measurement signal that is output from RF OUT port Th
153. System Calibration Data 132 Required Equipment uses etis ver eedem ed eade e uec i pre tt e cn 132 Procedure E Eme 132 Al VCXO Frequency Adjustment eer n et neae 133 Required Equipment a A UE P UAI eS Reo iss 133 lans M IM 133 A3 Local Level Adjustment eur Let CSS ee DOE Re EROS CS ane os 134 Required Equipment eee A ER PEE ee Sau E EE RE CONSO 134 Procedute icc id RUE DAP PE o nd v e aeu 134 A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment aaa aaa aaa 135 Required Equipnient 2 ve uer ee eat HUP A PORE eet e ese RE SM 135 Procedure M CE 135 A3 Output Level Adjustment 0 00 eer e 136 Required Equipment uper ne mt detect dpt Bo eh Stale acd e e ee e 136 PIO dE oi A A A AA A A 136 A4 AGC Gain Adjustment 0 0 0 0 ee ra 138 Required Equipment oe PEERS be Medo eue Rs 138 lunii MERECE 138 AA Local Level Adjustment oe ce Mis A a cR NE oer M DAS E IR 139 Required Equipment 5 Roe RU te C prin WS ROCK e Eu E VE ta 139 lue uu MERC ERE 139 A4 IF Gain Adjustment 140 Required Equipment eree eane cer A ee ee ds 140 Procedure M DIRE 140 Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment e ence enn 141 R qiired Eqiiipment cR A tds 141 POC Um 141 AS Reference Oven Adjustment Opt ID5 onv eeae 142 Required Equipmenty it nur A A PI e dere teet P Om ats 142 PrOC dUrE uus o ud us LIT a eis EO aieo eset ect lute tob d dea 142 A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment Opt 001 onv 144 Required Equipment aaa 144 Procedure 4 A a e ne 144 A2 D
154. V65 Chapter 2 55 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation mrad CV66 2 6 GHz W CV67 q mrad CV68 2 8 GHz Z W CV69 mrad CV70 3 0 GHz Z w CV71 q mrad CV72 56 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Airline with Open Termination Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation 1 MHz Z kw CV73 mrad CV74 N 10 MHz Z W CV75 v D mrad CV76 do 33 100 MHz Z w CV77 s 8 mrad CV78 o 4 2g 200 MHz Z W CV79 m mrad CV80 a 300 MHz Z w CV81 mrad CV82 500 MHz Z W CV83 mrad CV84 600 MHz Z W CV85 q mrad CV86 800 MHz Z W CV87 mrad CV88 1 0 GHz Z W CV89 mrad CV90 1 6 GHz Z W CV91 mrad CV92 1 8 GHz Z W CV93 mrad CV94 2 0 GHz Z W CV95 mrad CV96 2 2 GHz Z W CV97 mrad CV98 2 4 GHz Z W CV99 mrad CV100 2 6 GHz Z W CVIOI Chapter 2 57 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Frequency Measurement Calibration Value Reference Parameter Designation a mrad CV102 3 0 GHz Iz W CV103 q mrad CV104 58 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet
155. able Parts e gt Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 a ko D Table 6 9 Side View p z Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description 2 Desig S n 1 5041 9167 1 4 FOOT FL 1460 1345 5 2 WIREFORM 2 E5100 40002 0 4 STANDOFF 0515 1232 5 4 SCREW MACH M3 5 3 5041 9187 5 2 STRAP HANDL REAR 0515 0956 8 2 SCREW 4 5063 9209 8 2 STRAP HANDLE 5 E4991 60002 7 1 COVER ASSY 6 5041 9186 4 2 STRAP HANDLE FRT 0515 0956 8 2 SCREW 7 0515 2079 0 6 SCREW M4X8 8 5022 1190 4 l FRONT FRAME221 5 8160 0641 3 210cm GASKET BRAID 9 5041 9173 9 2 SIDE TRIM 221 5 Chapter 6 249 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Test Head Figure 6 10 Test Head e4991ase029 250 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 10 Test Head Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description Desig 1 E4991 04001 8 1 COVER TOP 2 E4991 60111 9 1 TEST HEAD 0515 0914 8 5 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 3 E499 1 04002 9 1 COVER BOTTOM 0515 0914 8 6 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 0403 0800 4 4 FOOT 4 1250 2468 0 3 RF CONNECTOR N SMA 0515 0914 9 8 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 5 E499 1 20063 6 1 HOUSING 0515 1006 1 4 SCREW MACH M3X0 5 6 E4991 25101 3 2 CUSHION 7 E4991 00601 6 1 PLATE 8 E4991 61601 4 1 RF CABLE ASSY 9 E499 1 61602 5 1 RF CABLE ASSY 10 E499 1 61603 6 1 RF CABLE ASSY Chapter 6 251
156. age to the E4991A The user recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes When the user recovery is complete the message as shown below appears Press Ct J Att J and of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLT ALT DEL to restart your system If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 328 Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later When you start up the E4991A for the first time or after executing system recovery you need to perform the initial registration of the Windows 2000 operating system of the E4991A NOTE You cannot use the front panel keys during the initial registration of the E4991A therefore connect the mouse and the keyboard before turning on the power NOTE If you perform the following procedure incorrectly a message asking you whether to return to the previous registration screen and perform the registration appears In this case follow the instruction to return to the previous registration screen Step 1 Turns on the E4991A Step 2 The Windows 2000 Professional Setup wizard appears Click the Next gt button Figure B 4 Figure B 4 Windows 2000 Professional Setup wizard Windows 2000 P
157. al Step 2 Disconnect the cables item 11 and 12 in Figure 6 16 on page 260 connected to the power supply N Az D o D O O 3 O T T O je o p o Step 3 Remove the three flat head screws item 1 in Figure 7 2 from top side Step 4 Remove the three screws item 2 in Figure 7 2 from the rear panel Figure 7 3 Power Supply Assembly removal e4991ase103 Step 5 Slide the power supply assembly toward front side and lift it Chapter 7 289 Replacement Procedure A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Removal A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Procedure Step 1 Remove the outer co
158. al P N E4991 901x0 This manual describes how to adjust and repair the E4991A and how to carry out performance tests Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Visual Basic for Applications are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in U S and other countries NOTE Software Installed The Windows operating system installed in this machine is customized for more effective operation and has different functions that are not part of the Windows operating system for ordinary PCs personal computers Therefore do not attempt to use the system in ways other than those described in this manual or to install Windows based software including anti virus software for ordinary PCs as doing so may cause malfunctions Also note the followings Do not update the Windows operating system installed in this machine to the Windows operating system for ordinary PCs Doing so will cause malfunctions Donotallow any computer virus to infect the system This machine has no virus check function nor anti virus software installed Agilent Technologies will not be held liable for any failure or damage arising from negligence regarding these prohibitions and warnings If the pre installed software is damaged somehow resulting in errant behavior by the machine perform a system recovery Contents 1 General Information Organization of Service Manual aeaee gR R RE ehh 18 Instrument Covered by This Manual eh 20 Required Equi
159. al computer Start Programs MS DOS Prompt You can confirm whether the E4991A LAN hardware and setting is available or not using ping command Type ping xxx xxx xxx xxx and press Enter key from the Command Prompt window Where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP address of the E4991A you assigned Figure 4 27 and Figure 4 28 are examples of the ping command response When the E4991A returns response to the personal computer such a Figure 4 27 is displayed When the E4991A doesn t return the response such a Figure 4 28 is displayed If the E4991A doesn t return the response there is a possibility that the A25 LAN Interface board gives problem Example of the ping command succeeds TYS Command Prompt Microsoft lt R gt Hindows NT lt TM gt lt C gt Copyright 1985 1996 Microsoft Corp C gt ping 146 268 113 187 Pinging 146 208 113 107 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 146 208 113 107 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 128 Reply from 146 268 113 187 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 128 Reply from 146 268 113 107 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 128 Reply from 146 208 113 107 bytes 32 time lt i ms TTL 128 G N gt Chapter 4 183 R p je o 7 y je je 5 Q Figure 4 28 Step 1 Step 2 NOTE Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Example of the ping command fails Command Prompt Microsoft lt R gt Windows NT lt TM gt lt C Copyright 1985 1996 Microsoft Corp C
160. ample in the Dielectric Measurement Mode the SENS CORR1 CKIT command has been attempted in order to set the calibration kit to the defined calibration kit used Select a measurement mode in which the command is valid Not available for this fixture An invalid command has been sent to the currently selected text fixture For example when the 16197A is selected the CALC 1 5 FORM command is attempted in order to set a prohibited measurement parameter e g complex dielectric constant Select an appropriate measurement parameter or display format Not available for this format The selected measurement parameter or display format could not be executed For example in the Dielectric Measurement Mode or in Magnetic Material Measurement Mode the DISP TRAC 1 5 GRAT FORM command is attempted in order to set a prohibited display format Smith Chart or Admittance Chart Select an appropriate measurement parameter or display format Not enough data The amount of data transferred to the E4991A by an eternal controller was less than the amount expected by the E4991A Match the amount of data to be transferred with the E4991A measurement points Numeric data error An error has been caused by numeric data including nondecimal numeric types In errors 121 to 129 an unspecified numeric error has occurred sobessan J Numeric data not allowed A numeric data element has been received at a position where the E4991A does not allo
161. ance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard Short Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 13 5 mw mW 2 6 mW 10 MHz 3 dBm Z 18 0 mw mW 3 6 mW G 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 63 mw mW 15 mw y 200 MHz 3 dBm Z 113 mW mW 26 mW E 3 300 MHz 3 dBm Z 163 mw mW 31 mW 5 500 MHz 3 dBm Z 263 mW mW 51 mW 2 z 600 MHz 3 dBm Z 313 mw mW 51 mw v 800 MHz 3 dBm Z 413 mW mW 51 mW 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 513 mw mW 51 mw 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z 663 mW mW 101 mw 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 813 mW mW 101 mw 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 913 mw mW 101 mw 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1013 mw mW 201 mw 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z 1113 mw mW 201 mw 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 1213 mw mw 201 mw 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 1313 mw mW 201 mw 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z 1413 mw mW 201 mw 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1513 mw mW 201 mw Chapter 2 77 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 50W Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 35 W w 0 09 w 7 0 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 36 W w 0 09 w q 7 2 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 43 W W 0 09 W 8 5 mrad mrad 1 7 mrad 200 MH
162. andard and Short Standard but not the Load Standard of the calibration kit has been completed the SENS CORR1 COLL SAVE command is attempted in order to set the calibration function On Measure all of the necessary calibration data B Block data not allowed Block data 1a received at a position where the E4991A cannot allow a block data element C Cal measure aborted One of the following problems has occurred During measurement of the necessary calibration fixture compensation data or during and after the calculation of calibration fixture compensation coefficients with calibration function turned On the settings of calibration fixture compensation acquired data points Fixed Full Range Fixed User Pwr or User Freq amp Pwr have been altered All measured calibration fixture compensation data acquired thus far and or the calibration fixture compensation function have been invalidated While the calibration fixture compensation acquired data point setting is in the user defined point condition User Freq amp Pwr the sweep condition Sweep Range Sweep Parameter Measurement Points and Sweep Type has been altered during measurement of the necessary calibration fixture compensation data or during and after the calculation of calibration fixture compensation coefficients with the 344 Appendix E 31 62 148 100 13 Messages Calibration required calibration function turned On All measured calibratio
163. anel remove the two screws fasting the rear panel to the A10 From the inner side of the rear panel remove the eight screws fasting the rear panel to the A10 and remove the A10 298 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure A21 Analog Interface Board and EEPROM Removal 5 a 5 DUDO o RO 00000000000 5 z EJ 5 TAJO a DCOU CCC coocoooovoo C U S Porro ooo oro seeee eeese Jes oo eco mocooongoocodecoocooooonoo aoooo moooo aocoooccoo AAA A21 Analog Interface Board and EEPROM Removal Tools Required e PLCC extractor Torx screwdriver T15 m Az 3 Procedure D O Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal 2 Step 2 Disconnect the following cables from the A21 Analog Interface board y 3 e A21 to the A10 Analog Motherboard flat cable item 3 in Figure 6 2 8 A21 to the A22 Front Panel Keyboard flat cable item 8 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 b A2 to the system fan cables Step 3 Remove a torx screw fastening the A21 to the rear panel Step 4 Remove the A21 Step 5 Remove the EEPROM from the original board then mount it on the new board Because the adjustment data 1s stored in the EEPROM If the EEPROM is defective it is necessary to perform all adjustments after replacing it Figure 7 6 EEPROM EEPROM
164. as Level Accuracy Test Opt 001 ttt ttt Most suspicious assembly tt Suspicious assembly 196 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 If you replace the A20 Digital Motherboard you need to confirm the jumpers for the specific CPU installed You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure And the BIOS detects the A27 Mass Storage connected to the A20 and displays these parameters It is a useful tool to verify whether the A27 gives problem or not The jumpers on the A20 and the BIOS setups are presented in the following pages To Identify the Motherboard Used The E4991A consists of Digital Motherboard and AMD K6 2 400MHz processor This motherboard displays the message Hunter ATX PE PHATX 03 xx xx xx and AMD K6 2 400 during the Memory checking after power on as shown in Figure 4 8 Chapter 4 197 R p o o D 7 y je o 5 Q Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Configure the Motherboard There are several jumpers on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct settings for the AMD
165. ating measurement failure 2 2 0 0 0 cette e 356 15 Contents Messages indicating the results or current status of processing 16 e 6 5 6 Fej y 9 5y 3 ct GQ 5 General Information The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer The manual contains information requisite to do performance test adjust troubleshoot and repair 17 General Information Organization of Service Manual Organization of Service Manual Tabs are used to divide the major chapter and appendix of this manual The contents of each chapter and appendix in this manual as follows Chapter 1 General Information The Service Manual is a guide to servicing the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer The manual contains information requisite to do performance test adjust troubleshoot and repair Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test This chapter provides information on how to verify the E4991A performance The maintenance consists of performance test and function test Chapter 3 Adjustment This chapter provides the adjustment procedure for the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer to ensure that the E4991A is within its specifications Chapter 4 Troubleshooting This chapter provides procedure to isolate the failure assembly in the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Chapter 5 Theory of Operation This chapter p
166. ation Constant Data The following is the procedure to update the E4991A firmware Step 1 Prepare the E4991A firmware installation disks three disks Step 2 Connect the mouse and the keyboard to the E4991A rear panel Then turn the E4991A on Step 3 Exit from the E4991A Measurement Display 1 Click System Exit on the menu bar and the Enter Password to exit dialog box will appear 2 Enter the password e4991a into the Password box 3 Click the OK button Then windows desktop screen is displayed Step 4 Double click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop Step 5 Insert the E4991A firmware installation disk1 1 of 3 into the FDD of the E4991A Step 6 Double Click the 3 1 2 Floppy A icon Appendix C 335 Firmware Update Firmware Update Step 7 Remove the old version of the firmware using the following procedure 1 Double Click E4991 msi icon The E4991A Setup Wizard uninstall will start automatically as shown in Figure C 3 Click on the Remove E4991A option button on the E4991A Setup Wizard as shown in Figure C 3 then click on the Finish button Click on the Close to exit the Installation Complete window Figure C 3 E4991A Setup Wizard uninstall ie E4991A Welcome to the E4991A Setup wizard Agilent Technologies Select whether you want to repair or remove E49914 C Repair E49914 Remove E4991A WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international trea
167. bled Disabled ESC Exit t Sel PgUp PgDn Mod i f y F2 F3 Color Passuord Check Boot To 08 2 Hait For Fi If Error Hit DEL Message Display Internal Cache External Cache System BIOS Cacheable C888 16k Shadow C488 16k Shadow C888 15k Shadow CC88 16k Shadow D888 16k Shadow D488 16k Shadow ESC Exit t Sel D889 16k Shadow PgUp PgDn Mod i fu DC88 16k Shadow Disabled F2 F3 Color S 4 e el o 4 0 3 e e 2 Chapter 4 203 Figure 4 38 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Advanced Chipset Setup Advanced Chipset Setup options are displayed by choosing Advanced Chipset Setup using gt fl keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 38 1s displayed Compare the default BIOS options as shown in Figure 4 38 with your E4991A s BIOS options If there is difference change BIOS option using gt f1 keys PageUp key and PageDown key If you want to exit from this page and go to main menu hit ESC key ADVANCED CHIPSET SETUP page fMIBIOS SETUP ADVANCED CHIPSET SETUP C 1998 finerican Megatrends Inc fill Rights Reserved B Function Enabled Available Options USB KB Mouse Legacy Support Disabled Disabled Port 64 68 Emulation Disabled Enabled SDRAM RAS to CHSR Override Disabled SDRAM CAS Latency 2 SDRAM RASH Timing 5 SDRAM Speculat
168. bleshooting Information for Analog Test Failure Test First Failed Test Test Point Probable Faulty Assembly No Al Ref A3 A4 A2DC A5 Freq A6 Test OSC Source Receiver Bias 001 Ref 1D5 Head 27 FREQ A3 VCO VCO Output for A3 tit ttt Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly NOTE When many tests fails in Table 4 1 replace A21 Analog Interface Board or A10 Analog Mother Board System Test Failure Troubleshooting in the Internal Test When System Test Fail is displayed in the internal test check each error using the following procedure ANALOG IF TEST 1 Turn off the instrument and then turn on it 2 Ifthis fail still remains replace A21 Analog Interface Board EEPROM TEST Turn off the instrument and then turn on it 2 Ifthis fail still remains perform EEPROM Initialize and all adjustments using the Adjustment Program as shown in Chapter 3 Adjustment 3 If this fail still remains replace EEPROM and then perform Write ID EEPROM Initialize and all adjustments using the Adjustment Program as shown in Chapter 3 Adjustment and Chapter 8 Post Repair Procedures 4 Ifthis fail still remains replace A27 HDD and then perform all adjustments using Adjustment Program as shown in Chapter 3 Adjustment and Chapter 8 Post Repair Procedures KEYBD TEST 1 Check the status of each front key and turn off the instrument and then turn on it 2 Ifthis fail still remains replace A22 Front
169. cables Remove the two wire cables from the power switch assembly item 13 in Figure 6 2 using a soldering iron Remove the A22 304 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Replacement Procedure A51 LCD Removal A51 LCD Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small and 2 medium Procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal Remove the six screws fastening the LCD cover to the front panel Disconnect the flat cable item 8 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 from the A22 Front Panel Keyboard m m e 9 o e 6 3 oO m 2 B x e e oO on Disconnect the two backlight cables from the Inverter board as described in A52 Inverter Board Removal Remove the four screws fastening the LCD to the LCD cover and remove the LCD Remove the mylar ribbon cable item 4 in Figure 6 2 from the LCD and remove the LCD The mylar ribbon cable and their connector are fragile You must be attentive as described in NOTE on page 303 when you are instructed to disconnect or connect it A52 Inverter Board Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small and 2 medium Procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal Remove the two screws fastening the Inverter board cover to the LCD cover and remove the cover Discon
170. cal Area Connection icon with the right button and click Properties This opens the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 4 30 Figure 4 30 Network dialog box Local Area Connection Properties RHB General Connect using 99 Intel R PRO 100 VM Desktop Adapter 2 Components checked are used by this connection c Client for Microsoft Networks ivi a File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M Y Internet Protocol TCP IP Install Uninstall Properties r Description Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network R p o o D 7 y je o e 3 Q Show icon in taskbar when connected OK Cancel e5070bse115 b Click Internal Protocol TCP IP icon c Click the Properties button This opens the TCP IP Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 4 31 Chapter 4 185 Figure 4 31 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting TCP IP Properties dialog box IP Address tab Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties HB General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings C Obtain an IP address automatically IP address 192 168 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway n A Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Gbtain DNS serv
171. ce LAN keyboard and mouse interfaces and interfaces to PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect buses A21 Analog Interface Board A2 analog interface board has several functions an interface function between digital and analog blocks the other interface functions for A22 front panel keyboard a power control function and measurement function The A21 contains PLD Programmable Logic Device for interface functions a BNC connector for external trigger input DSP Digital Signal Processor for post measurement data processing and EEPROM that stores correction constants for adjustment data A22 Front Panel Keyboard A22 front panel keyboard detects operator s inputs key inputs and RPG inputs from the front panel and transmits them to the A21 analog interface board A24 GPIB Board A24 GPIB board provides IEEE 488 standard bus services for instrument The board interfaces the bus to A20 digital motherboard to receive and process GPIB commands A25 LAN Interface Board for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 A25 LAN interface board allows the analyzer to communicate with an external controller or an external server via a network interconnection Protocol is TCP IP and it works for 10base T and 100base TX A26 Display Board A26 display board controls LCD The control signals are transmitted through a flat cable and a backlight voltage is supplied through A52 inverter board en 2 D je lt o 9 oO 5 O bens
172. ck Light OK Replace A51 LCD Replace A50 Power Supply Replace A21 Analog Interface Board Replace CPU Memory or A20 Digital Motherboard Replace A26 Display Board Replace Flat Cable Replace A52 Inverter Chapter4 Troubleshooting No Display Troubleshooting Step 1 Check LED on A50 Power Supply From the E4991A rear check the LED inside of the lattice of the rear panel as shown in Figure 4 4 If the LED doesn t light the A50 Power Supply assembly is failure Figure 4 4 LED on the A50 Power Supply Step 2 Check power LED If the power LED on Front Panel doesn t light and the fans inside of the E4991A doesn t run problem seems in the A21 Analog Interface board or the flat cable between the A21 and the A22 Front Panel Keyboard If power shutdown occurs immediately after the power LED lights there is a possibility that the fan stops The E4991A has three fans inside There is one CPU fan on the A20 Digital Motherboard There are two system fans which are secured on the frame A power shutdoun occurs the moment the system fans stops In this case remove the E4991A outer cover and make sure whether the fans run or stop S 4 p 9 t 5 4 172 Z 9 e a ES O Chapter 4 159 Step 3 Figure 4 5 NOTE Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Troubleshooting No Display Troubleshooting Check LED of Num Lock key Hit the Num Lock key which is on the keyboard as shown in the Figure 4 5
173. ction 230 Chapter 5 o ps e to e oO D G 2 i pan n Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer 231 Replaceable Parts Ordering Information Ordering Information To order part listed in the replaceable part lists quote the Agilent part number with a check digit indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent office The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of the order To order a part not listed in the replaceable part table include the instrument model number the description and function of the part and the quantity of parts required Address the order to the nearest Agilent office Direct Mail Order System Within the USA Agilent can supply parts through a direct mail order system There are several advantages to this system Direct ordering and shipping from the Agilent Parts Center in Mountain View California Nomaximum or minimum on any mail order there is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local Agilent office when the orders require billing and invoicing Prepaid transportation there is a small handling charge for each order No invoices In order for Agilent to provide these advantages please send a check or money order with each order Mail order forms and specific ordering information are available through yo
174. ction is On within the designated Searching range so calculation of the equivalent circuit parameter Calculate Parameter button or CALC 1 5 EPAR command could not be executed Measurement points within the sweep range if the partial search function 1s On within the designated Searching range must be set to 3 or above sobessan J N No active marker Because the marker is not displayed the sent command has been ignored For example when the marker is not displayed the CALC 1 5 MARK SET command has been attempted in order to change the instrument setting of the E4991A First use the CALC 1 5 MARK 1 8 command to show the marker on the display No data available in memory This occurs when the marker s Statistic Analysis Function Statistics button is Off and an attempt has been made to read out the statistic analysis result by using the CALC 1 5 MST DATA command Turn the Marker s Statistic Analysis Function to On and acquire data for statistic analysis No data trace displayed Because the data trace is not displayed the sent command has been ignored For example when the data trace is not displayed the CALC 1 5 MARK ON command has been attempted in order to set a trace displaying a marker as the data trace First use the CALC 1 5 MATH FUNC command to display the data trace no error No error has occurred This message is not normally shown on the LCD display but returned after the Appendix E 349 94
175. d Memory Trace This occurs when there are no data stored in the Memory Trace and the CALC 1 5 MATH FUNC command has been attempted in order to display the Memory Trace Before displaying the Memory Trace use the CALC 1 5 MATH MEM command to store the data into the Memory Trace Not allowed for the current trigger source An invalid command for the presently selected trigger source has been sent For example when the trigger source is set to internal trigger Internal the TRIG EVEN command has been attempted in order to set the trigger event mode detecting point for triggering at each measurement point On Point or at each On Segment This operation is valid only when internal trigger is not set as the trigger source After setting the trigger source to Manual External or GPIB Bus change the Trigger Event Mode Not allowed in power sweep An invalid command has been sent to the oscillator level sweep while it is in progress For example during the oscillator level sweep the SWE TYPE command has been attempted in order to set the sweep type to log sweep This operation is invalid during the oscillator level sweep Confirm that the command is valid for the oscillator level sweep Not allowed in this measurement mode 350 Appendix E 80 79 47 120 128 48 321 108 Messages Not available for this fixture A command has been sent that cannot be executed in the currently set measurement mode For ex
176. dards described in the Declaration of Conformity If it is used as a system component compliance of related regulations and safety requirements are to be confirmed by the builder of the system Ground the Instrument To avoid electric shock the instrument chassis and cabinet must be grounded with the supplied power cable s grounding prong DO NOT Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of inflammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment clearly constitutes a safety hazard Keep Away from Live Circuits Operators must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made by qualified maintenance personnel Do not replace components with the power cable connected Under certain conditions dangerous voltage levels may remain even after the power cable has been disconnected To avoid injuries always disconnect the power and discharge circuits before touching them DO NOT Service or Adjust the Instrument Alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT Substitute Parts or Modify the Instrument To avoid the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument Return the instrument to an WARNING M O IL WARNIN
177. e brackets are not paired or the character violates the standard Invalid file name During the execution of file save recall command the character string contained an inappropriate file name For example when executing a recall command the file name extension was incorrect Specify an appropriate file name Also when saving data on a floppy disk this error message will be shown if the disk is not properly inserted or the disk is write protected Invalid material size The definition of the size of the test material in a Magnetic Material Measurement is invalid For example an attempt has been made to set the outer diameter of the test material to a smaller figure than the inner diameter Set the outer diameter of the magnetic material to a larger size than that of the inner diameter Invalid separator When the parser compiler is expecting a separating symbol a character that 1s not a separating symbol has been sent For example when the program message SENS CORRI COLL FPO USER OPC is sent instead of two program messages correctly separated by a semi colon as SENS CORRI COLL FPO USER OPC the instrument cannot perceive the separation When sending two program messages simultaneously be sure to insert a separating symbol such as a semi column between the two messages Invalid string data Even though character string data are expected the received character string is invalid for some reason refer to IEEE488
178. e the device driver and to install it if you experience the above situation E E4991A Logo Screen Agilent E4991A RF impedance Material Analyzer W L Agilent Technologies right 2000 Agilent Technolog All rig shits reserved Rev 1 0 During the logo screen is displayed an operating system Windows 98 is loaded from A27 to DIMM64MB Measurement View The measurement View as shown in Figure 4 13 is displayed after the E4991A firmware is loaded without problem G Measurement View Trace 1 E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Trece Meas Format Scale ay Marker Stimulus Trigger Utility Save R iul i n MN Kid li E E E AR Bias DFF Uncal 166 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Step 7 Power On Self Test The power on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts For details refer to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 172 In addition a message of the Internal Test In Progress is displayed during the power on self test in progress If an hang up occurs during the power on self test problem seems in analog block such as Al Reference OSC A3 Source A4 Receiver or A2 DC Bias Opt 001 R p o o D 7 y je o e 3 Q Chapter 4 167 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY433 and later AAA
179. e D E 172 Analog Test Failure Troubleshooting in the Internal Test 173 System Test Failure Troubleshooting in the Internal Test 174 Function Depend Troubleshooting ehh 175 Functlons iis A A A Oe erdt cde pagi dpi 175 To check the Front Panele w on co SE DA e reta 179 To check the LCD ou pce sie A CREEK ALA CR tee wage TUER W 179 To check the External Keyboard ssi ssa veh oops tati 179 To check the Mouse 4 pz ere A asi ape md id 180 To checkthe FD Dissector coed Satta O EE sia ACE BO OE ott enti Erud eur 180 To check the VGA Display Output 0 0 0 ccc m e ne neae 180 To check the External Trigger Input sss r esscrosriep erviras a C aaa aaa 181 To check the LAN for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MYA321 aaa aaa 181 To Check the LAN for serial prefix MY433 and later 184 To check the Printer Parallel port for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 188 To check the Printer USB port for serial prefix MY433 and later 0 20 0 eee eee eee eee 188 To check the GPIB ter REED id 188 External Tests Failure Troubleshooting n 189 To Execute the External Test i ERR e ie DURER DAE 189 The contents of the extemal fest 2 22 5 hse aoa theses bo ad coe eee ee ab chew PA ais 189 Front Keyboard amp LCD Display Test wawa waza aa aaa 190 Source TE usc RO OO DET AAA 190 Qus UNIT TL EP AO A hed O aaa OO APS 191 Input AF T Nest a risa deed OE AAA pz A ENT A waded SUA dois 191 TE Gait Tes
180. e GPIB Chapter 4 175 Figure 4 18 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting To check the Device Driver for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Make sure first whether the E4991A device drivers are installed properly or not by the following procedure if you experience the E4991A function doesn t work Exit from the E4991A Measurement Display as shown in How to exit from the E4991A Measurement View on page 155 Then windows desktop screen is displayed Right mouse click My Computer icon and click Properties Then System Properties dialog box is displayed Click Device Manager tag The operating system detects all the necessary device driver Figure 4 18 is displayed However if it doesn t detect the necessary device driver a yellow back grounded icon as shown in Figure 4 19 is displayed The Figure 4 19 shows the example of the operating system doesn t detect the LAN board 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX properly So the device of the LAN board with the yellow back grounded icon is displayed View Installed Device Drivers System Properties HHE General View devices by type C View devices by connection H Disk drives m Display adapters Sy Floppy disk controllers H 6 Hard disk controllers AY HP IB Interfaces gu Keyboard m Monitors Mouse 8 Network adapters q Other devices 4 Ports COM amp LPT
181. e Save Recall softkey menu 36 Select Recall State 37 Select the file 3 sta 38 Press Meas Format to show the parameter setup menu 39 Select Meas Parameter Y 40 Press Trigger to make a measurement 4 Record the Y readings to the calculation sheet 42 Calculate the test result according to the calculation sheet the record it to the performance test record SHORT Termination 43 Record the 16190B s SHORT termination calibration values on the calculation sheet 44 Connect the 16190B s SHORT termination to the 7mm connector 45 Press Meas Format to show the parameter setup menu 46 Select Meas Parameter Z 47 Press Trigger to make a measurement 48 Record the Z readings to the calculation sheet 49 Calculate the test result according to the calculation sheet the record it to the performance test record 50 W Termination 50 Record the 16190B s 50 W termination calibration values on the calculation sheet 5 he Connect the 16190B s 50 W termination to the 7mm connector 52 Press Trigger to make a measurement 53 Record the Z and q readings to the calculation sheet 54 Calculate the test result according to the calculation sheet the record it to the performance test record 10 cm airline with OPEN Termination 55 Record the 16190B s 10 cm airline with OPEN termination calibration values on the calculation sheet 56 Connect the 16190B s 10 cm airline a
182. e another measurement is already underway the Measurement Initialize Request INIT command has been ignored For example this happens when changing the setting of INIT CONT to OFF and the TRIG SOUR command to BUS or when attempting a trigger with the TRG command If the INIT command is sent to the E4991A before the sweep is completed without a wait time it is regarded as an invalid command Invalid block data Even though the block data is expected the received block data is invalid for some reason refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 6 2 For example before the length of block data has been filled an END message is received Appendix E 347 101 121 171 106 TT 103 151 131 Messages Invalid character Invalid character In the error message character string an invalid character has been found For example when a message SENS CORR1 COLL FPO USER is sent toward the proper program message SENS CORR1 COLL FPOg USER the ampersand symbol 8 will be perceived by E4991A as an invalid character In case the parameter is inputted at the end provide space between the command and the parameter Invalid character in number There are invalid characters in the received data and type For example an alphabetic character has been found in a decimal numeric or a 9 has been found in octal data Invalid expression An expression data element is invalid refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 7 2 For example th
183. e hardware of the Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit as shown in Figure 2 13 The installation procedure is as follows a Attach the test head of the E4991A to the Test Head Stand included in the kit 46 Chapter 2 CAUTION CAUTION Figure 2 13 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test for Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit b Mount the cable holder attached to the 7 mm coaxial connector module of the Heat Resistant Cable on the Fixture Stand with its captive screws c Place the Fixture Stand on a box a carton or a substitute to level the Heat Resistant Cable at the same hight as the DUT Port on the test head Adjust the hight of the Fixture Stand for 223 mm 10 mm with a spacer another carton or books inserted between the Fixture Stand and box as shown in the figure d Connect the 1 meter RF Extension Cable Assembly and Heat Resistant Cable to the test head of the E4991A as shown in the figure Do not force the RF extension cable assembly It is strongly suggested that the RF extension cable assembly be connected last of the setup procedure in order to prevent the joint of SMA connectors on the cable from being forced and damaged T en 2 e pur e 2 D n Do not force the high temperature cable or else the cable may be impaired Avoid bending the cable pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Option 007 Hardware Installation for Performance Tests
184. e rata Pim Shawn ls Poa oped A 51 Low Loss Capacitor Check 20 0 eda eee dn oby RR di MA 52 Calculating Sheet 2 i he sae or See PE NY DEER WRA Y AS TG EIE US 53 Performance Test 0 3 a eg edad Adds 53 Euncho Test terose ease we Do dares perigee sae oe RETI S ep UTD U Ur SUED IS 73 Test Record uses o eee a COH dees Nn re e eg 74 Performance Test Record i A ERE VAN RB AR EUR EN WEN 74 Performance Test Record Option 007 0 cece e 89 Performance Test Record Option 0101 0 ccc ee 102 Function Test Record iiis Ro Rp ek a REUS EA CEU ee ILE DE E 116 3 Adjustment Safety Considerations uc A SEAS RIED MID DERE DS TIRE CRT RON 118 Warm up for Adjustment 118 Required Equipment id a pote tele eS SR a aloe die apod 118 Preparation for using the Adjustment Program 00 cece eee ene 119 Required Controller AS A Ee RE 119 Installing a GPIB Card 82340B 82341C D or 82350A 01 eee eee eee 119 Installing Agilent VEE for Personal Computer neea r rae 119 Installing Adjustment Program into Your PC 1 eee cette eens 119 Contents 10 Equipment Setup i dp td eaa da pan a 120 E4991 A Control Mode EI WA et lloc QR a E 121 Order of Adjustments s LR A OP A ue ac ue e eie a e p uei et 122 Required Adjustment after Replacing Assembly aaa aaa eee 124 Adjustment Progr 125 Adjustment Program Mem 125 How to perform the Adjustment Program uauaaaaaaaaaaaaaa erener enere 128 Initialization of the
185. e signal level of the RF2 is 6 dBm typically The frequency difference between RF1 and RF2 is 12 5 kHz equal to the IF signal RF1 and RF2 frequencies for each band Measurement Frequency RF1 RF2 Bandl 1 MHz 1739 9 MHz 2303 9875 MHz 2304 MHz Band2 1740 MHz 2259 9 MHz 1151 9875 MHz 1152 MHz Band3 2260 MHz 2679 9 MHz 1151 9875 MHz 1152 MHz Band4 2680 MHz 3000 MHz 1151 9875 MHz 1152 MBz A 150MHz oscillator 75MHz VCXO x 2 in Al supplies a reference frequency signal for the PLL controlled oscillators that create RF1 and RF2 signals If nothing is connected to Ext Ref In connector on the rear panel it is locked to an internal VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator But if an external 10 MHz signal is supplied to the Ext Ref In it is locked to the external signal The RF2 is generated by a PLL circuit with the 6MHz reference signal 150MHz reference signal 25 The RF is generated by a PLL circuit with the reference signal that is the RF2 divided by the fractional N divider If one of the VCO control voltages in the PLLs is out of limits PLL Unlock notification is displayed The created 150 MHz signal is also divided into a 10 MHz signal 150MHz 15 and it is supplied to A3 and A4 for reference frequency through A10 analog motherboard The 10MHz reference signal is output to Int Ref Out BNC connector on the rear panel directly A3 Source Board A3 source board supplies a meas
186. e tests with the test setups for Option 010 to be done in addition to the performance tests for standard E4991A Frequency Accuracy Test e Power Level Accuracy Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Opt 001 Specification Except for the Power Level Accuracy the E4991A Option 010 specifications are same as the standard E4991A specifications Therefore the Frequency Accuracy Impedance Measurement Accuracy and DC Bias Level Accuracy of the E4991A with Option 010 are tested to the same test limits as the standard E4991A The Power Level Accuracy specification of the Option 010 is different from that of the standard E49914 as follows Power Level Accuracy 2 dB 1 GHz without Opt 010 5 5 dB 1 GHz with Opt 010 3 dB gt 1 GHz without Opt 010 7 6 dB gt I GHz with Opt 010 48 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test for Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit Test Procedure Step 1 Perform all the necessary tests using the Option 010 test head The each test procedure for Opt 010 test head is the same as that for the standard test head Then connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 Equipment Setting for Opt 010 Test Head N v t AE 3 3 o3
187. ed USE De vice 2 Enable d Boot from USB Device Disabled EMI Reduction Enabled F1 Help 1 Select Item Change Values F9 Setup Defaults ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu FiO Save and Exit e499 1 ase3001 Next select Advanced OS Options using keys The current setup states are displayed as shown in Figure 4 49 If Installed OS or Enable ACPI is incorrect select it using keys and change the setting by pressing keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press s key Advanced OS Options Sub menu PhoenixBlOS Setup Utility Advarced Installed OS Plug and Play Enable ACPI No Reset Configuration Data No Secure Setup Configuration No Fi Hep 11 Select item Change Values F9 Setup Defauts ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Ext are Boot Menu The Boot Menu shown below is displayed by choosing Boot using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu The current setup states are Chapter 4 215 Bunooysa qno J y Figure 4 50 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later displayed as shown in Figure 4 50 If the setup is incorrect select it using 1 1 keys and change the setting by pressing z keys If you want to exit from this page and return to main menu press ese key Boot Menu Boot Order Hard Drive
188. ed a password first when the BIOS setup utility is executed Ifa password is not assigned in your E4991A set it using BIOS setup utility Move the cursor to Change Supervisor Password using gt 1 keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu and you have to set the password to e4991a don t set it to others Save Settings and Exit It is necessary to save BIOS options before exit on the BIOS setup utility when you want to change and save a BIOS option Move the cursor to Save Settings and Exit using gt 1 keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then the message of Save current settings and exit Y N is displayed If yes hit Y key Then the BIOS setup utility is closed Exit Without Saving If you cancel the changes of the BIOS options move the cursor to Exit Without Saving using gt fl keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then the message of Quit without saving Y N is displayed If you want to quit without saving hit Y key Then the BIOS setup utility is closed Chapter 4 209 R p o o D 7 y je o 5 Q Figure 4 43 25061356058 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later When you replace the A20 digital motherboard you need t
189. edute uei betas testa ape eue a ERE taken du 301 Replacement Procedure nins E R R RR c T eee 302 A26 Display Board Removal arare dro CTE N aaa aaa As 303 Tools Requited eta eut s tertie deesse ut dee qe eee sete ee 303 Pr ced re EUER 303 A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal eee 304 Tools Required e A oa Uude eu 304 lunes MET A A WE RS alee le oh Oo Muti legs 304 ASI LED Removalo vc b tee AUTRE A eee LER es te eq ARE dA 305 Tools Requited rate EUER ARUM RIS n C ipM UE 305 Procedute ceca Edd Tat Ri UNO UE IERI ad Do ER a ies 305 A52 Inverter Board Removal 0 0 ccc eh hh e 305 Tools Requited E LEER 305 PIOCEdUIe Sore rre E MERE RN EE ep E eene eret 305 8 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures i ssp a PA eb AA dA eR e EE SEE Re HEN Rd 308 A Manual Changes Manual Changes asa AR ONA SN BS Eda E BOUES LE CER eei 312 B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 00 cece ee 314 14 Contents Notes on executing system recovery ooooooor mh rh 314 Procedure to execute system recovery for serial number JPIKH and A27 that has never been replaced 315 Procedure to execute system recovery for serial number other than JP1KH or A27 that has been replaced 317 System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later 319 Types oftsystent recoyVerles aaa gae RO AA is 319 Notes on executing system recovery lisse hh re 319 Procedure to execute
190. ement will control Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the back of this manual Typeface Conventions Bold Boldface type is used when a term is defined For example icons are symbols Italic Italic type is used for emphasis and for titles of manuals and other publications Hardkey Indicates a hardkey labeled Hardkey Softkey Indicates a softkey labeled Softkey Hardkey Softkey1 Softkey2 Indicates keystrokes Hardkey Softkey1 Softkey2 E4991A Documentation Map The following manuals are available for the E4991A Operation Manual P N E4991 900x0 Most of basic information necessary for using E4991A is described in this manual It includes the way of installation preparation measurement operation including calibration performances specifications key definitions and error messages Programming Manual P N E4991 900x1 The Programming Manual shows how to write and use program to control the E4991A Service Manu
191. en detected on the media in which the data is to be stored For example when saving the file to a floppy disk the space available in the floppy disk is not sufficient Check the amount of available space in the media in which the date is to be stored sobessan J Segment table empty or insufficient table Because the segment sweep table has not been created a sent command has been ignored For example before the segment sweep table is created the SWE TYPE command is attempted in order to set a sweep type as the segment sweep Before carrying out a segment sweep create the segment sweep table Settings conflict Even though the program data element has been received and it conforms to the standard execution is not possible with the present condition of the E4991A String data error An error caused by a received series of character data elements quotation mark character has occurred In errors 151 to 159 an unspecified character string error has occurred String data not allowed A string data element has been found at a position where the E4991A does not allow string data elements For example when the program message TRIG SOUR MAN has been sent instead of the correct program message TRIG SOUR MAN the double quote is regarded by the E4991A as invalid Refer to the command reference and confirm whether the double quote is required in the parameter of a particular command Suffix not allowed A suffix
192. en the E4991A is turned on from cold PLL unlock is displayed during few time very occasionally because warm up time is not enough If PLL unlock is displayed continuously after warm up there is a possibility to need repair and or adjustment There is a possibility that Al Reference OSC or A3 Source or AS 10MHz Oven Opt 1D5 gives problem To Execute the Internal Test If the Power on test failed is displayed after the E4991A is turned on you should perform the internal test to isolate the faulty assembly You can execute the internal test by the following procedure Press Menu on the front panel Select System Menu using e key Select Diagnostic using Ga key and press key Select Internal Test using Ga key and press key Select Test Start using y key and press key in the internal test menu Internal Test The internal test contains the following two tests Analog Test This is the test to check the function related to the analog section When the analog test fails Analog Test FAIL will be displayed System Test This is the test to check the function related to the digital section When the system test fails System Test FAIL will be displayed 172 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Analog Test Failure Troubleshooting in the Internal Test When Analog Test Fail is displayed in the internal test replace the faulty assembly as shown in Table 4 1 The contents of
193. endix describes how to install the operation system to the A27 mass storage When the operating system in the A27 mass storage has damage you can recover it before replacing the A27 by the following procedure 313 2 N Y D n Ce O e Q 4 JO uonej ejsu ueis S g NOTE NOTE System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 The E4991A has a backup file in the H drive Hidden Drive of the A27 mass storage which includes a compression image of the system files application files and calibration constant data You can recover these files using the following procedure when the operating system in the A27 mass storage has damage There are two types of the system recovery This section describes the procedure for each system recovery Procedure for the E4991As that have serial number prefixed JP1KH and their A27 mass storage has never been replaced Procedure for the E4991As that do not have serial number prefixed JP1KH or their A27 mass storage has been replaced Notes on executing system recovery Performing system recovery causes the following o The following settings of the E4991A are initialized e Network settings GPIB settings Printer settings o Ifthe firmware has been updated after purchasing the E49914A the firmware when you purchased the product is rec
194. er addre automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced e5070bse116 d Ifthe IP Address and the Subnet Mask are already assigned go to Step 7 If they are not assigned yet enter them as follows IP Address 192 168 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway blank To enter a specific IP Address and Subnet Mask click Use the following IP address option button to select it Input your IP address in the IP Address box and your subnet mask in the Subnet Mask box overwrite the initial values Step 7 By clicking OK button the network settings take effect Verify the E4991A LAN settings and response to a command from the external computer as follows a Onthe external computer click Start button in the Windows Start menu bar using a mouse b Click Programs and Accessories and Command Prompt to open the DOS Command Prompt window c Type a ping command followed by the E4991A IP address as ping xxx xxx xxx xxx where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP address such as 192 168 0 1 assigned in Step 6 d Press key on the keyboard d The external computer displays a message of ping command response from the E4991A Figure 4 32 shows an example of normal result that indicates the IP address packet size and a response time counted by the computer The ping command is repeated 4 times 186 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Figure 4 32 Exa
195. er and the E4991A USB port Press Preset key Then the E4991A is initialized Start printing by following mouse procedure Then Press OK on Print Menu Display PRINT Graph Mono If any fail to work there is a possibility that the A20 Digital Mother board connection of the printer cable or the printer driver gives problem To check the GPIB Procedure Perform the E4991A performance test program If the controller can not detect the E4991 A there is a possibility that the A24 GPIB board or connection of the GPIB cable gives problem 188 Chapter 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting If you can t identify the faulty assembly using the internal tests you can execute the external tests in addition to the internal tests These external tests are also built in tests and 9 tests are available in the E4991A diagnostic test mode Refer to Table 4 2 to know which assembly is probably faulty and should be replaced To Execute the External Test To execute the external tests perform the following procedures This procedure should be done with the mouse and the external keyboard Connect the mouse and the external keyboard to rear panel and then turn on E4991A Click System Menu on the menu bar Click Diagnostic in the System menu Double Click External Test in the Diagnostic menu Then the External Test dialog box
196. ew You need to exit from the E4991A Measurement View to perform the some troubleshooting The following is the procedure to exit from the E4991 A Measurement View Connect the mouse and the external keyboard to the E4991A Then turn on the E4991A Click System Exit from the menu bar This opens the Enter Password to exit dialog box as shown in Figure 4 1 Enter Password to exit dialog box Enter Password to exit x Cancel Keyboard 24991 ase052 Enter the password e4991a into the Password box by using the Enter Password to exit dialog box that appears by clicking the Keyboard button or by using the external keyboard Exit from the E4991A Measurement View by clicking the OK button Then windows desktop screen is displayed You have to shut down the E4991A by the following procedure and turn on E4991A after exiting the E4991A Measurement View 1 Click Start Shut Down 2 Click the Shut down button in the Shut Down Windows dialog box to select it 3 Click the OK button Chapter 4 155 R p o je o D 7 y O o 5 Q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting To Troubleshoot the Instrument To Troubleshoot the Instrument The primary procedural tool in this section is the flowchart The flowchart contains entire troubleshooting path from a failed instrument to a working one and will direct you in an orderly manner through the possible failure symptoms Reference lette
197. fault Cal Coefficient Adjustment NOTE If your instrument has option 001 A2 DC Bias perform A2 Adjustment after performing the A4 Adjustment A5 Adjustment Opt 1D5 If you replace or adjust A5 Board perform A5 Adjustment only The A5 Adjustment consists of the following adjustment A5 Ref Oven Adjustment Opt 1D5 A2 Adjustment Opt 001 If you replace or adjust A2 Board perform A2 Adjustment only The A2 Adjustment consists of the following adjustments A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment Opt 001 A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment Opt 001 A2 DC Bias R C Adjustment Opt 001 Default Cal Adjustment If you replace A1 or A3 or A4 Board perform Default Cal Adjustment The Default Cal Adjustment consists of the following adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 NOTE It is necessary to perform the system backup after performing the adjustment so that the system recovery can be performed correctly For details refer to System Backup for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 on page 149 Write ID Write ID executes writing the serial number and the option information Perform this procedure whenever you replace EEPROM with new one This process can not be performed without inputting a password This password is ctuKobe EEPROM Initialize EEPROM Initialize executes initializing the EEPROM When you replace EEPROM with new one perform this procedure
198. figure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later Connect the external keyboard and mouse to the E4991A rear panel connectors Turn the instrument on Wait until the E4991A boots up Do not press any key until the E4991A measurement view appears Press key on the front panel Click Misc Setup in the softkey menu Click Control Panel in the softkey menu Scroll the function viewer to find System icon and double click System This opens System Properties window as shown in Figure 4 44 System Properties window System Properties General Notwoik Identification Hardware User Profiles amp dvanced 518730 EM 00097007 00000 omputer x86 Family 6 Model 8 Stepping 10 AT AT COMPATIBLE 261 172 KB FAM a raed 04991250098 Verify that 260 148 KB RAM is displayed in the Computer profile as shown in Figure 4 44 If it is not correct the A20 board is faulty Click OK button to close the window Turn the E4991A off before proceeding to the next step To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options BIOS is the PC s built in program describing the standard procedure of basic inputs and outputs for the system hardware BIOS involves the system BIOS start up program and BIOS setup utility The E4991A starts up first with the BIOS when the power is turned on Use the following procedure to confirm or set the BIOS options known as the BIOS setup u
199. frame to the bracket connect item 3 in Figure 6 5 on page 242 when the A4 is removed 296 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure A1 A2 Opt 001 A3 A4 Board Removal Step 5 Remove the board using the extractor m m D 9 o e 6 3 oO 7 2 B x e e oO on E p Chapter 7 297 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Replacement Procedure A5 Reference Oven Board Opt 1D5 Removal AS Reference Oven Board Opt 1D5 Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the two cables item 11 and 12 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 connected to the AS Remove three screws on left side panel Remove the A5 A10 Analog Motherboard Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small and 2 medium Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the front frame as described in Front Panel Removal Remove the A20 Digital Motherboard as described in A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Remove the Al A2 Opt 001 A3 A4 boards as described in A1 A2 Opt 001 A3 A4 Board Removal Remove the three screws fastening the cover item 5 in Figure 6 4 on page 240 to the chassis assembly and remove the cover From the outer side of the rear p
200. g Chapter 3 149 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Adjustment System Backup for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 AMIBIOS System Configuration Display AMIBIOS System Configuration C 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Main Processor AMD K6 2 400 Math Processor Built In Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB 3 15 Base Memory Size 640KB Ext Memory Size 64512KB Display Type VGA EGA Floppy Drive B AMIBIOS Date External Cache None Serial Port s 3F8 2F8 07 15 95 Parallel Port s 378 512KB Disabled Power Management APM SMI ATA PI Device s Primary Master i Type Size LBA 32Bit Block PIO Mode Mode Mode Mode Hard Disk 8064MB LBA Off 16Sec 4 PCI Devices PCI Onboard IDE PCI Slot 2VGA PCI Onboard Bridge Device PCI Onboard USB Controller IRQ9 PCI Slot 1 Ethernet IRQ10 PCI Slot 3 Unknown Device IRQ11 e4991ase069 The contents of the system backup disk are loaded while Figure 3 24 is displayed After a short time the system backup start screen as shown in Figure 3 25 is displayed Searching File Display AMIBIOS System Configuration C 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Main Processor Math Processor Floppy Drive A Floppy Drive B AMIBIOS Date AMD K6 2 400 Built In 1 44 MB 315 None 07 15 95 Base Memory Size Ext Memory Size Display Type Serial Port s Parallel Port s 640KB 64512KB VGA EGA 3F8
201. h Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z 2 6 kW kw 254W 117 8 mrad mrad 17 6 mrad 10 MHz 3 dBm 42 8 W W 43W q 19 6 mrad mrad 2 0 mrad 100 MHz 3 dBm 2 15 W W 0 42 W 10 0 mrad mrad 2 0 mrad 200 MHz 3 dBm 1 18 W W 0 22 W 11 7 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 78 W W 0 16 W q 12 8 mrad mrad 2 6 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 47 W W 0 09w 20 9 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 44 W W 0 09 W 44 5 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 59 W W 0 12W q 43 5 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 1 25 W W 023W 28 2 mrad mrad 5 2 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 4 17 W W 0 72W 48 6 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 1 95 W W 0 29w q 58 7 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 1 34 W W 0 10 W 211 6 mrad mrad 14 3 mrad 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 2 05 W W 0 23 w 118 2 mrad mrad 12 8 mrad 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 4 37 W W 0 64 W q 86 4 mrad mrad 12 5 mrad 80 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 6 GHz 3 dBm vA 14 8 W W 2 2W q 98 6 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 3 0 GHz 3 dBm ya 6 9 W W L1W q 93 0 mrad mrad 13 8 mrad Chapter 2 81 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test
202. has been added after numeric data where a suffix here meaning Unit cannot be Appendix E 353 134 102 310 124 69 223 211 113 Messages Suffix too long inputted For example when the program message DISP TRAC1 Y PDIV 0 01rad has been sent instead of the correct program message DISP TRACI Y PDIV 0 01 the suffix is regarded by E4991A as invalid Refer to the command reference and confirm that the suffix can be added to the numeric data element Suffix too long The suffix here meaning Unit display is written with more than 12 characters refer to IEEE488 2 7 7 2 4 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type has occurred For example when the program message SYST POFF is sent instead of the proper program message SYST POFF a colon has been incorrectly inserted and it will be perceived by the E4991A as an unrecognized command Delete one colon in order to send the appropriate command System error In the E4991A one of the so called System Errors has occurred T Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element exceeds 255 excluding leading zeros refer to IEEE488 27 7 2 4 Too many segments or points While editing the list sweep table a setting has been attempted that exceeds the maximum number of segments 16 the maximum number of measurement points 201 per segment or the maximum number of total measurement points 801 in all segments
203. he keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Hard Drive CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN lt Enter Setup gt Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the create user backup image press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options Choose One of the following Recover Factory Backup Image Create User Backup Image Recover User Backup Image Exit Dm WMH Enter a Choice _ NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 324 Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the create user backup image press E here You chose to create a backup image file of your system The system will perform a quick integrity check of the file structure on the C Drive It will then copy the C partition to an image file and store it on the System Recovery partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the create user backup image If you want to cancel the create user backup image press EJ here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an
204. her You need the keyboard for this operation Shut down the E4991A Connect the keyboard to the E4991A Insert the disk for the system recovery into the floppy disk drive of the E4991A Press the standby switch of the E4991A to turn it on When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold of the keyboard until this screen disappears EE Agilent Technologies starting usse O bo Mu After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 326 Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later Step 6 The following screen appears Select Removable Devices with of the keyboard and press of the keyboard Boot Menu Hard Drive CD ROM Drive Network Boot LAN lt Enter Setup gt Step 7 The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the user recovery press 4 here Agilent Technologies System Utilities Recovery amp Backup Options Choose One of the following Recover Factory Backup Image Create User Backup Image Recover User Backup Image Exit B w N H Enter a Choice _ NOTE If the abo
205. his procedure is to adjust the A3 output level and flatness Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Power Meter 438A E4418A B or E4419A B Power Sensor 8482A 8481D or E9304A Calibration Kit 16195B 7mm N f Adapter 11524A The E9304A cannot be used with the 438A Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A3 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 12 Figure 3 12 A3 Output Level Adjustment Setup 1 2 7mm N f E4991A SEBA Power Meter E4108 EPM SERIES POWER METER Test Head e4991ase005 136 Chapter 3 Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment Step 4 Click OK then wait till the measurement completion Step 5 Disconnect the power sensor and the adapter from the 7mm connector Step 6 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 A3 Output Level Adjustment Setup 2 2 hi 50 9 Termination
206. ime T en 2 e pur e 2 D n Allow the E4991A to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute any of the performance tests pue So 90UELIOHSd Z Ambient Conditions Perform all performance tests in ambient conditions of 23 C 5 C 70 RH Performance Test Interval The performance test should be performed periodically The recommended test interval is 12 months The test interval depends on maintenance of use and the environmental conditions under which the instrument is used You may find that the test interval could be shortened or lengthened however such a decision should be based on substantial quantitative data Performance Test Record and Calculation Sheet Performance test record lists all test points acceptable test limits test result entry columns and measurement uncertainties The listed measurement uncertainties are valid only when the recommended test equipment is used The calculation sheet is used as an aid for recording raw measurement data and for calculating the performance test results The procedure for using the calculation sheet and performance test record is 1 Photo copy the calculation sheet 2 Follow the performance test procedure and record the measurement values the E4991A s reading etc into the specified column on the calculation sheet 3 Calculate the test result using the appropriate equation given on the calculation sheet and record the test
207. is opened Click the button of the each test to execute the specified test Perform each test according to the instruction The contents of the external test The external test contains the following tests Front Keyboard amp LCD Display e Source Out ATT Input ATT IF Gain Front Isolation Test Head DC Bias ZMeas Chapter 4 189 R p o o D 7 y je o 5 Q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting Front Keyboard amp LCD Display Test This test is to check if the function of the front keyboard and the LCD works normally Required Equipment Nothing Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the Front Keyboard amp LCD Display Test Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 1 Front Keyboard amp LCD Display on External Test dialog box Push the front key according to the front keyboard map and confirm if the key and the knob work normally Click each LCD button on LCD Display Menu and confirm if the function of the LCD works normally Click PASS and exit this window if all tests is passed Click FAIL and exit this window if a test Is failed Source Test This test is to check if the function of the receiver reads the level of the source normally Required Equipment
208. isplay of theE4991A appears Figure B 8 Network Identification Wizard dialog box 2 2 Completing the Network Identification Wizard You have succesfully completed the Network Identification Wizard To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Finish Cancel e5070bqj005 Appendix B 331 eBeJojS SSEN Z7V W LD lt E o oO 3 EJ a e y D ct e 3 e System Installation for A27 Mass Storage Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later 332 Appendix B O m 3 S 9 ex ko on D 9 Firmware Update This appendix describes how to update the E4991A firmware When you want to update the E4991A firmware refer to this appendix 333 Figure C 1 Step 1 Step 2 Firmware Update Firmware Update Firmware Update Required Equipment e E4991A with keyboard and mouse Three blank floppy disks DOS format How to make the E4991A Firmware Installation Disk The following is the procedure to make the E4991A Firmware Installation Disk Copy the following files from Agilent Technologies web site to the three floppy disks using your computer s FDD e diskl 1 of 3 e4991a msi e499101 cab disk2 2 of 3 e499102 cab disk3 3 of 3 e499103 cab Assign the Label name as follows using the properties of your computer s Windows Explorer as shown in Figure C 1 e DISK 1 for disk1 e DISK 2 for disk2 DISK 3 for disk3 Wind
209. ive Read Logic Disabled DRAH Speed Manual DRAM Read Burst Timing x4EDO x4FPM DRAM Write Burst Timing x4EDO x4FPM DRAM Lead Off Timing 11 7 23 Fast EDO Read Cycle Timing Disabled Speculative Lead Off Timing Memory Address Drive Strength Enhanced Paging Disable D DRAM Refresh RAS Cycles HCLK s DRAM Refresh Rate Suspend Refresh Type ESC Exit 4 Sel Cache DRAM Refresh Time HCLK s PgUp PgDn Modify Memory Hole F2 F3 Color Bbit I 0 Recovery Tine ESC Exit t4 Sel 16bit 1 0 Recovery Time Disabled PgUp PgDn Hod i fy Clock Chip Spread Spectrum Disabled F2 F3 Color 204 Chapter4 Figure 4 39 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Power Management Setup Power Management Setup options are displayed by choosing Power management Setup using gt fl keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 39 is displayed Compare the default BIOS options as shown in Figure 4 39 with your E4991A s BIOS options If there is difference change BIOS option using gt fl keys PageUp key and PageDown key If you want to exit from this page and go to main menu hit ESC key POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP Page AMIBIOS SETUP POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Available Options AT Power Management APM Power Button Function ATX Instant On Support Green PC Monitor Power
210. l Keyboard o7 noes ARTS A ode FOX Uso quer DT pts 223 A24 GPIB Board R R R 0 t ecce A ex ee oem eR ce be aee p ce ees 223 A25 LAN Interface Board for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 1 223 A26 Display Board i sep RE Sica ale Hake TIRES P SEE WA EE EA ERA Ra 223 A21 MassStorage DISE DIVE ws 04 0a YEAH osaa TT 224 A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive RII I eee 224 AST LCD Liquid Crystal Display esee seb FL Sk SPE MY RENI ee A Be MEUS 224 A52 Inverter Board y A MERE RR RARE ERREUR AR UE EL BS 224 Analog Section ooo o EAT TA el PETRA ru sees s lr dae 225 Al Reference Oscillator Board mh 227 A3 Source Board us a dee a en E ado 227 A4 Receiver Bois A isa be 228 A6 Test Head Board for the standard and Option 010 0 cece eee es 229 A10 Analog Moherhboard eh en neae 229 A2DC Bias Board Option 001 renan eek ade 229 AS Reference Oven Board Option 1DSn 0 0 ccc tte teen n eens 229 6 Replaceable Parts 12 Orderne Information sess E Heese Ronee te te a Sowa ode fate odes 232 Direct Mail Order System ii W OOO AA da E reed 232 Exchange Assembles a O Mines poe A I CE M OE s 233 Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 00 ee 234 Power Cables and Plug Configurations 0 0 ccc e 234 Top View Major Assembly oooooooooooor e e 234 Top View Cables amp Other Parts doreen esur io au eua a aaa 236 Top View Miscellaneous Parai 238
211. l from the A3 source board through RFOUT port and test cable Opt 010 and applies it to the DUT device under test At the same time the test head outputs two signals Vch and Ich signals that represent the voltage across the DUT and the current through the DUT A10 Analog Motherboard A10 analog motherboard connects A1 A2 A3 and A4 to A21 analog interface board A2 DC Bias Board Option 001 A2 DC bias board contains a DC bias source that provides a bias voltage up to 40V and a bias current up to 100 mA The bias voltage across the DUT and the bias current through the DUT are monitored and feedback to the bias source This feedback operation automatically maintains the bias voltage or current at the same level as the setting value regardless of the DUT s dc resistance The bias source allows a current compliance limit to be applied in the voltage bias mode and a voltage compliance in the current bias mode A5 Reference Oven Board Option 1D5 A5 reference oven board supplies a high stability 10MHz external reference signal to A1 reference oscillator board via an external connection path between rear panel BNC connectors When the 10MHz external reference output Option 1D5 is connected to the EXT REF Input connector on the rear panel the internal REF OSC output signal is phase locked to the external reference signal ge 2 D je lt o 9 e 5 O bens o O 2 Chapter 5 229 Theory of Operation Analog Se
212. lave Not Installed Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled Month Jan Dec ESC Exit 4 Sel Day 81 31 PgUp PgIn Modify Year 1981 2899 F2 F3 Color 202 Chapter 4 Figure 4 37 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Advanced CMOS Setup Advanced CMOS Setup options are displayed by choosing Standard CMOS Setup using gt 1 keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 37 is displayed Compare the default BIOS options as shown in Figure 4 37 with your E4991A s BIOS options If there is difference change BIOS option using gt 1 keys PageUp key and PageDown key If you want to exit from this page and go to main menu hit ESC key ADVANCED CMOS SETUP Page AMIBIOS SETUP ADVANCED CMOS SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Disabled Available Options Pri Master ARMD Enulated as Auto Disabled Pri Slave ARMD Emulated as Auto Enabled Sec Master ARMD Emulated as Auto Sec Slave ARMD Emulated as Auto ist Boot Device ist IDE HDD 2nd Boot Device Floppy 3rd Boot Device Disabled 4th Boot Device Try Other Boot Devices Floppy Access Control Hard Disk Access Control S M A R T for Hard Disks BootUp Num Lock Floppy Drive Swap Floppy Drive Seek PS 2 Mouse Support Typemat ic Rate System Keyboard Primary Display Disabled No Read Hr ite Read Hr ite Enabled On Disa
213. lemental Performance Characteristics of the Operation ds Manual g do 33 Required Equipment 2 50 Description Recommended Model 9 0 Performance Test Kit 16190B 3 Calibration Kit 16195B furnished with E4991A Procedure Preparation 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Test Head 24991 ase006 Press Preset to preset the E4991A Press Sweep Press Segment Table Menu to show segment table Woe POR Set the measurement points using Add Segment as Figure 2 6 Chapter 2 35 Figure 2 6 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Segment Table 1 Power Level 3 dBm Averaging 8 Trace Meas Format Scale Display Marker Stimulus Trigger Utility Save Recall System Segment Table Segment No b a Start Hz 4 Al 2 86 Stop Hz ECHEM 3G Number Of Points KIK IK ll llr llr e o Point Average mm Delete Segment More Ready Bias OFF Uncal Comp OFF Avg 1 ExtRef 6 Press Sweep 7 Press Sweep Type Segment to use segment table 8 Press Trigger Setup 9 Select Trigger Source Manual 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2
214. llel Port IRQ Parallel Port DMA Channel OnBoard IDE ESC Exit t Sel PgUp PgDn Modify F2 F3 Color Chapter 4 207 S 4 p e el o 4 0 3 e e 2 Figure 4 42 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Auto Detect Hard Disks Auto Detect Hard Disks options are displayed by choosing Auto Detect Hard Disks using gt fl keys and hit Enter key at the BIOS setup utility main menu Then Figure 4 42 is displayed You can find A27 mass storage hard disk or flash disk drive parameters for IDE1 drive connected to the primary channel installed in the A20 Digital Motherboard If you doubt the mass storage doesn t work properly make sure that the E4991A system detects the mass storage correctly using this option AUTO DETECT HARD DISK SETUP Page AMIBIOS SETUP STANDARD CHOS SETUP C 1998 American Megatrends Inc All Rights Reserved Date nn dd yyyy Hed TIN 24 2801 Time hh nm ss 16 14 48 Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB A Floppy Drive B Not Installed Type Size Cyln Head HPcom Pri Master Auto 5729 12416 15 8 6 Pri Slave Not Installed Sec Master Not Installed Sec Slave Not Installed Boot Sector Virus Protection Disabled 208 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Change Supervisor Password Usually you are requir
215. lue for this calibration kit Appendix E 355 sobessan J Messages DC bias overload Messages indicating the internal status of the equipment Messages that indicate the internal status of the equipment include equipment irregularities as well as the results of processing or current processing status These messages do not have numbers Messages indicating measurement failure DC bias overload During application of DC bias voltage a sudden change in the connection condition of the DUT has lowered the direct current impedance resulting in momentary over current at the DC bias source Do not remove the DUT during application of DC bias If this error occurs frequently during normal measurement this may be due to instrument failure PLL Unlock An error has been detected in the internal PLL Phase Lock Loop circuit of the E4991A The PLL is used to generate a stable frequency source This can occur due to an error of the external reference signal or when the power is turned ON in a low temperature environment If the external reference signal has not been inputted or shows no error instrument tuning or repair is necessary If the message does not disappear in a few minutes after turning the power ON instrument tuning or repair is necessary Power on test failed An error has been detected during the self test after turning on the power RF overload There has been a ranging failure in the internal circuit due to a s
216. ly overwritten with no chance of recovering any data Use Option 1 to recover the system from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently deleted files on the system s primary C partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit _ The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard to start the factory recovery If you want to cancel the factory recovery press _E here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit _ Never turn off the power during the factory recovery because doing so may cause serious damage to the E4991A The factory recovery will be complete in about 5 minutes When the factory recovery is complete the message as shown below appears Press Ct J A Jo and ofthe keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLT ALT DEL to restart your system If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor After restart the screen for initial registration appears Execute initial registration For information on the execution procedure refer to Initial Registration of E4991A for serial prefix MY433 and later on page 329 322 Appendix B System Installation for A27
217. mO 51 mQ 10 23 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 6 63 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mO 101 mQ 8 13 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 9 12 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 5 06 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 5 56 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 6 06 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 6 56 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 7 06 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 7 55 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Standard 500 Averaging 8 O Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 0 4 17 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 4 20 10 MHz 3 dBm Z x 0 09 Q 4 26 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 4 28 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 09 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 5 10 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 11Q 5 30 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 5 29 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 14 Q 4 92 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 7 mrad 4 93 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 19Q 4 44 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 4 44 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 4 70 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 4 69 800 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 5 37 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 5 36 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 5 99 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 6 00 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 24 Q 9 60 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 7 mrad 9 65 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 24 Q 10 43 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4
218. mple of normal ping command test result ed99lasei0 If the E4991A doesn t return the response the external computer displays a message of Request timed out as shown in Figure 4 33 In this case a failure in the A20 digital motherboard is suspected Figure 4 33 Example of no response for ping command west timed west timed out 2499 tase 102 Chapter 4 187 R p o o D 7 y je o e 3 Q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting To check the Printer Parallel port for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Test Equipment Please refer http www agilent com find ctdkobe_printers for the latest supported printers Printer Cable Parallel Cable Procedure Connect the printer cable between the printer and the E4991A printer parallel port Press Preset key Then the E4991A is initialized Start printing by following mouse procedure Then Press OK on Print Menu Display PRINT Graph Mono If any fail to work there is a possibility that the A20 Digital Mother board connection of the printer cable or the printer driver gives problem To check the Printer USB port for serial prefix MY433 and later Test Equipment Please refer http www agilent com find ctdkobe_printers for the latest supported printers Printer Cable USB Cable Procedure Connect the printer cable between the print
219. mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 1 95 W W 0 29 W 58 7 mrad mrad 8 5 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 1 34 W W 0 10 W 211 6 mrad mrad 14 3 mrad 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z 2 05 W W 0 23 W 118 2 mrad mrad 12 8 mrad 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 4 37 W W 0 64 W q 86 4 mrad mrad 12 5 mrad Chapter 2 107 mn 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 6 GHz 3 dBm IZ 14 8 W w 22W q 98 6 mrad mrad 14 4 mrad 3 0 GHz 3 dBm IZ 6 9 W W L1W q 93 0 mrad mrad 13 8 mrad 108 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 20 dBm Z 14 5 kw kw 1771W 663 4 mrad mrad 50 6 mrad 10 MHz 20 dBm 161 8 W W 7 7 W 74 2 mrad mrad 5 3 mrad 100 MHz 20 dBm Z 3 33 W W 0 42 W 15 5 mrad mrad 2 1 mrad 200 MHz 20 dBm Z 1 47 W W 0 22 W 14 6 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 20 dBm 0 91 W W 0 16 W 14 9 mrad mrad 2 6 mrad 500 MHz 20 dBm Z 0 52 W W 0 09 W 23 1 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 20 dBm Z 0 48 W W 0 09 W 48 5 mrad mrad 8 7 mrad 80
220. n fixture compensation data acquired thus far and or the calibration fixture compensation function have been invalidated During measurement of the necessary calibration data the measurement has been interrupted by the Abort Cal Meas button The calibration data have been invalidated In order to recover the calibration fixture compensation function or the equipment setting valid just prior to the event click the Recover Cal Compen state button Also if necessary retry measurement of the calibration fixture compensation data Calibration required While the calibration function is not set to On a GPIB command has been sent even though that command can only be executed while the calibration function is On For example when the calibration function is Off the SENS CORR2 COLL command has been attempted in order to measure fixture compensation data After measuring all necessary data turn the calibration function On Can t calculate equivalent parameters The measured data are not suitable for approximate calculation into the equivalent circuit parameters selected in the equivalent circuit model Retry measurement or select an appropriate equivalent circuit model Can t execute data examination Even though the data for statistic analysis has been acquired an attempt has been made to read out the statistic analysis results by changing the setting conditions such as sweep start rate and using the CALC 1 5 MST DATA command befo
221. nd OPEN termination to the 7mm connector using the following procedure see Figure 2 9 38 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test a Fully retract the threads on the 7mm connector Then insert the marked side tip of the airline center conductor b Gently cover the airline center conductor with the airline outer conductor with the logo side down To prevent damage don t let the conductor scrape the edge of the outer conductor Mate the outer conductors then torque the connection to 136 N cm A 1 2 inch open end wrench may be necessary to hold the airline stationary c Gently inserts the airline center conductor into the open termination center conductor Mate the outer conductors Then torque the connection to 136 N cm using the Torque Wrench p n 8710 1760 A 1 2 inch open end wrench may be necessary to hold the airline stationary Figure 2 9 10 cm Airline with OPEN Measurement Test Setup T en 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Ua Ua RES C6S02005 57 Press Trigger to make a measurement 58 Record the Z and q readings to the calculation sheet NOTE Ignore the reading at 1 3 GHz and 2 8 GHz 59 Press Save Recall to show the Save Recall menu 60 Select Recall State 61 Select the file 20 sta 62 Press Trigger to make a measurement Chapter 2 39 NOTE C6S02006 Figure
222. nect the backlight primary cable item 7 in Figure 6 2 from the Inverter board Disconnect the two backlight cables from the Inverter board Remove the two screws fastening the Inverter board to the LCD cover and remove the Inverter board Chapter 7 305 Replacement Procedure A52 Inverter Board Removal 306 Chapter 7 Qo U O o T pu ol o m v x e O e o mi n Post Repair Procedures This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E4991A operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one 307 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures Table 8 1 Post Repair Procedures lists the required procedures that must be performed after the replacement of an assembly CPU DIMM Memory or the EEPROM These are the recommended minimum procedures to ensure that the replacement is successfully completed Table 8 1 Post Repair Procedures Replaced Required Adjustments Verification Assembly or Part Correction Constants CC Al Reference Oscillator Board Perform the following required adjustments using the Al Adjustment in Spot Adjustment of the program A1 VCXO Frequency Adjustment A3 Local Level Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local level Adjustment A4 IF Local AGC Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment System Backup To Execute the Internal Test on page
223. ntroduction This section provides the information on the performance test setups and procedures for the E4991A Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit To execute the performance tests for the Option 007 both the Temperature Characteristic Test Kit and the E4991A are required Required Test The E4991A with Option 007 requires the following performance tests with the test setups for Option 007 to be done in addition to the performance tests for standard E4991A Power Level Accuracy Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Specification Except for the Power Level Accuracy and Impedance Measurement Accuracy the E4991A Option 007 specifications are same as the standard E4991A specifications The Power Level Accuracy and Impedance Measurement Accuracy of the Option 007 E4991A are described below Power Level Accuracy 2 dB 1 GHz without Opt 007 2 dB 4 dB 1 GHz with Opt 007 3 dB gt 1 GHz without Opt 007 3 dB 6 dB gt 1 GHz with Opt 007 Impedance Measurement Accuracy The values of accuracy equation terms Ea Zs and Yo for Option 007 are different from those of the standard E4991A Refer to Specifications on Chapter 11 of the E4991A Operation Manual Required Equipment The required equipment for the Option 007 performance tests is same as that for the standard E4991A Test Procedure Perform all the necessary performance tests for the standard E4991A Install the E4991A and th
224. o confirm the jumper settings for the specific CPU installed The jumper settings information is provided in Configure the Motherboard on page 210 You also need to confirm the BIOS options using the BIOS setup utility procedure The BIOS setup procedure is described in To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 211 To Identify the Motherboard Installed Confirm the splash screen is displayed in the beginning of the boot process as shown in Figure 4 15 Configure the Motherboard There is a jumper on the A20 digital motherboard that must be configured to the correct setting Confirm that the jumper setting is Normal as shown in Figure 4 43 A20 digital motherboard jumpers location and settings 10 A u x sL Operating mode TAST T4 oa B S i Normal 8 Dg aa o 2 B Configure 7 BN 0 A 990 f LJ k Recover VA U f 118 5 000 D 0 so Om o D 11823000 A D c O o U Testing DRAM on the Motherboard When the A20 digital motherboard is replaced with a new one it is advisable to perform the DRAM test before proceeding to the BIOS setup utility procedure Confirm the DRAM count in accordance with the following procedure 210 Chapter 4 Figure 4 44 Procedure Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Troubleshooting To Con
225. odule Replacement for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 DIMM64MB Memory Module Replacement for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 There are two DIMM64MB memory module on the A20 Digital Motherboard Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the power supply as described in A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 There are three DIMM sockets on the A20 Two DIMM memory modules are installed at the socket U12 and U13 Cut the cable tie which ties DIMM memory Unlatch the two clips and remove the DIMM memory To replace the DIMM memory reverse the above procedure Install the DIMM memory in the socket and latch the clips Tie the DIMM memory and the socket using the cable tie A1 A2 Opt 001 A3 A4 Board Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small and 2 medium e Open end wrench 5 16 inch e Open end torque wrench 5 16 inch set to 10 in Ib for reconnecting SMA connector Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the front frame as described in Front Panel Removal Disconnect the semi rigid cables connected to the board assembly Remove the two screws fastening the extractor to the chassis Remove the two nuts item 1 in Figure 6 8 on page 247 fastening the BNC connector on the rear panel when the A1 is removed Remove the two screws fastening the front
226. of the display Also by pressing this key when a dialog box is onscreen you can cancel any entry mode and the box closes i e this key can be used instead of pressing the Cancel or x button in a dialog box When you press this key when a dialog box is onscreen the entered setting is executed and the box closes This key can also be used instead of pressing the OK button in a dialog box 25 T en 2 e pur e 2 D n pue So 90UELIOHSd Z Performance Test and Function Test How to Set the E4991A for Maintenance Menu key By pressing this key the leftmost menu opens in the menu bar at the top of the display Then the arrow keys aio can be used to move the cursor to other menus or to the desired item in a menu Pressing the click key G3 selects and executes the item The key is used to work with the menu bar when a mouse is not available To close an open menu press the Menu key again 26 Chapter 2 NOTE Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Performance Test Introduction This section provides the test procedures used to verify that the E4991A meets its specifications The performance tests can also be used for incoming inspection and for verification after troubleshooting or adjustment If the performance tests indicate that the E4991A is NOT operating within the specified limits check your test setup then proceed to troubleshooting if necessary Warm Up T
227. ot be carried out and there is a risk of damage to the software or hardware of the E4991A 342 Appendix D sobessan J Messages The E4991A can display error messages as well as messages that indicate the internal operating status of the equipment This appendix explains what these messages mean by listing them in alphabetical order 343 168 10 Messages Additional standards needed Messages showing the status of the E4991A are displayed in the lower left area of the E4991A LCD screen These messages include error messages that occur during the execution of GPIB commands and others that indicate the internal status of the equipment Error messages are indicated following the character string Err and can be read out by a GPIB command Other kinds of messages are indicated without the Err character string and cannot be read out by a GPIB command This section explains the meaning of each message and how to resolve the problem it indicates Alphabetical Order Errors with negative error numbers are basically general errors for GPIB instruments defined by IEEE488 2 On the other hand errors with positive error numbers have been defined specifically for the E4991A A Additional standards needed Before completing data measurement that requires calculation of the calibration coefficient a GPIB command is sent to turn the calibration function On For example when only measurement of the Open St
228. overed Files you created using the save function are not affected but we recommend backing them up before executing system recovery for precautionary purposes If the E4991A is turned off without shutdown process Microsoft Scandisk runs after E4991A logo is displayed If serious trouble is found during the scan disk reinstall the operating system And if the operating system still doesn t boot properly after reinstallation A27 has to be replaced physically And if you encounter the following problems try to reinstall the operating system before replacing the A27 xxx file is missing is displayed on the DOS screen The E4991A logo screen is not displayed after Searching for Boot Record from IDE 0 OK is displayed Windows always boots with Safe Mode If the hard disk failed and has been replaced after purchase the state when the replacement was performed is recovered 314 Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Procedure to execute system recovery for serial number JP1KH and A27 that has never been replaced Step 1 Connect the external keyboard to the E4991A Step 2 Insert the system recovery disk furnished with the E4991A in the floppy disk drive of the E4991A Step 3 Turn the E4991A on Step 4 Press F key on the external keyboard as soon as the AMI BIOS System Configuration Display as shown in Figure B 1 is displa
229. ower Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 2 8 GHz 40 dBm Z W a CV133 q mrad a CV134 72 Chapter 2 Function Test Low Loss Capacitor Test Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Description Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit Minimum Impedance 0 W mW 100 mw Frequency 5 2 GHz GHz 5 8 GHz Chapter 2 73 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Test Record Performance Test Record Agilent Technologies E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Mainframe Serial No Test Date Test Head Serial No Temperature C Calibration Kit Serial No Humidity R H Tested by Frequency Accuracy Test Without Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 MHz 10 00 Hz Hz 0 491 Hz 3 GHz 30 00 kHz kHz 0 369 kHz With Option 1D5 Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 MHz 1 00 Hz Hz 0 003 Hz 3 GHz 3 00 kHz kHz 0 008 kHz OSC Level Accuracy Test Power Level Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 1 dBm 1 GHz 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 0 dBm 3 GHz 3 00 dB dB 0 35 dB 7 9 dBm 3 GHz 3 00 dB dB 0 35 dB 10 dBm 300 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 26 dB 15 dBm MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 20 dBm 50 MH
230. ows Explorer example E Exploring 3 Floppy 10 x File Edit View Go Favorites Tools Help e gt OB X IO Xs B All Folders A Desktop My Computer c EN E Ca100 C H My Documents J Program Files H E Windows 2 object s e4991ase134 1 2 My Computer 1 Insert the disk1 1 of 3 into the FDD of your computer 2 On the Windows Explorer click 3 1 2 Floppy A and confirm the files 3 Right click on 3 1 2 Floppy A then click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 4 Enter the Label name in the Label box of properties dialog box General for the disk1 as shown in Figure C 2 and press the OK button 334 Appendix C Firmware Update General Toots Compression O Firmware Update m gt Figure C 2 Properties Dialog Box example 3 Floppy Properties 207 o m D c Labet DISK_1 Type 3 Inch Floppy Disk File system FAT Wi Used space 1 253 888 bytes 1 19MB Wi Free space 203 776 bytes 199KB Capacity 1 457 664 bytes 1 38MB Drive e5070ase221 5 Perform 1 through 4 for each disk NOTE If the label name is not assigned the firmware update for the E4991A will not be done correctly How to update the E4991A firmware It is possible to update the E4991A firmware but not the following software by this procedure OS Operating System e VBA Visual Basic for Application Calibr
231. p Next gt gt to go to the next test DC Bias Test Option 001 only This test is to check if the function of A2 DC Bias Board Option 001 works normally Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B Open Short 50 ohm Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the DC Bias Test Connect the Test Head to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 8 DC Bias on External Test dialog box Connect the OPEN 0 S Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Chapter 4 193 R o o D E y je o e 5 Q Step 5 Step 6 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting Connect the SHORT 0 ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Connect the 50 ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Z Meas Test This test is to check if the measurement of OPEN SHORT and LOAD works normally Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B Open Short 50 ohm Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the Z Meas Test Connect the Test Head to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Te
232. pment es ege OE WIARY WPA AKA OE A AE ter ek en 21 2 Performance Test and Function Test Required Equipment 5c vesc A og ae anes oe ie ered e M 24 How to Set the E4991A for Maintenance he 25 Performance Tests ls LH TU rupta iore dunes op used tutos 27 Introduction eec ue xvi e PR ICQ e CEN EE T PRENSA EUN ed 27 Frequency Accuracy Tests vov LES Over enu putet eL HD RE MA MN EAR 28 Power Level Accuracy Test ii du EET ENSURE ERE NE EE Maes 31 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test 35 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Option 001 0 0 cece cece n 42 Performance Test for Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test KI 46 Introduction ee w ibaa A DEG e T SAM OO haa bb ba a IP OUEEA DEM ERE Carel 46 Required Teste toes pio sto ey Sits A hae fel los enh SEE S 46 Specification OP PRO OOOO OO ep gue eu ee GO Pe PLI pe aee Fudge e eee 46 Required Equipnient 2 say S EESERUDTWUEME CBE a REPAS 46 Test Procedure ici RR e KLA A bea ERO E URN U AE WA VEN d EE E 46 Performance Test for Option 010 Probe Station Connection KID ooo 48 Introduction iiiv ils Rey eR GER We edi ERE SY eva er RE A OE Ged GOES 48 Required Testi SI S ORAN UESTRE TUS ORTUS 48 Specific llon eso e REC O e A 48 Test Procedures oro SS enor ieee RUET4G SHY UU STO URS SUI yaad P 49 Function Test iecore ek queo id ee p e ed e et 51 Introduction i cuo osdewetus e e SEES Im E M 51 Warm Up Time scele eX re a tad eR ea 51 Ambient Gonditioris sarrer
233. power supply Remove the three flat head screws item 1 in Figure 7 2 from top side Remove the three screws item 2 in Figure 7 2 from the rear panel Power Supply Assembly removal 88 05 js i Bos BOs 209 E 020 080 080 2 go jen 6 go OS icf O G G oak e4991ase127 Step 5 Slide the power supply assembly toward front side and lift it 288 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Procedure Step 1 Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Remov
234. puter gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Install the Agilent VEE into your computer see the Agilent VEE for Windows Installing Adjustment Program into Your PC 1 Make a copy of the E4991A adjustment program named ADJE4991A EXE in a directory of the hard disk drive in your PC The program is downloadable from the CTU Kobe web site 2 Double click on the filename on the Windows Explorer to start extracting the self extracting archive 3 You will be prompted to enter directory name for installing the program files Click UNZIP to use default directory C ADJE4991A 4 Confirm the message of unzipped successfully on WinZip Self Extractor Display and then click OK and Close Chapter 3 119 Adjustment Preparation for using the Adjustment Program Equipment Setup Table 1 1 lists the equipment required to perform the Adjustment procedures described in this chapter Use only calibrated test equipment when adjusting the E4991A Performing adjustments requires the system described in this section The Hardware Setup is shown in Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Adjustment Hardware Setup PERSONAL COMPUTER GPIB Cables ERE Frequency Counter 0000 z EA pad SA oooO Qoo D n oo ooo g
235. quation 1 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV37 mrad a CV38 10 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV39 y ao mrad a CV40 2 3 100 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV41 SA mrad a CV42 2 z 200MHz 3dBm Z W a CV43 v mrad a CV44 j 300 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV45 mrad a CV46 500 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV47 mrad a CV48 600 MHz 3 dBm Z W a CV49 mrad a CV50 800MHz 3dBm Z W a CV51 mrad a CV52 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV53 mrad a CV54 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV55 mrad a CV56 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV57 mrad a CV58 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV59 mrad a CV60 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV61 mrad a CV62 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV63 q mrad a CV64 Chapter 2 63 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z W a CV65 q mrad a CV66 2 6 GHz 3 dBm W a CV67 mrad a CV68 2 8 GHz 3 dBm W a CV69 mrad a CV70 3 0 GHz 3 dBm W a CV71 q mrad a CV72 64 Chapter2 Performance Test and Function Test Calculating Sheet Standard Airline with Open Averaging 8 Freq Power Measurement E4991A Reading Test Result Level Parameter a Equation 1 MHz 3 dBm Z kW a CV73 mrad a CV74 10 MHz 3 dBm W a CV75 mrad a CV76 100 MHz 3dBm Z W a CV77 mrad a CV78
236. quency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 002 Q 7 50 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 19 4 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 005 Q 5 63 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 2 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 03 Q 5 13 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 5 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 07 Q 4 63 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 11 Q 4 67 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 31 Q 4 57 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 5 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 77 Q 4 92 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 0 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 45 Q 5 20 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 19Q 6 98 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 12Q 9 42 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 8 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 31 Q 6 81 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 91 Q 7 74 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 4 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 2 06 Q 7 01 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 74 0 6 64 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 4 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 300 8 87 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 1 Frequency Power Le
237. quency Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the VCXO on the Al Reference Oscillator Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter 53181A Opt 010 and 030 53131A Opt 010 and 030 or 53132A Opt 010 and 030 BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A1 Adjustment in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Make sure that nothing is connected to the Ext Ref In on the E4991A rear panel Step 4 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 10 gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Figure 3 10 A1 VCXO Frequency Adjustment Setup E4991A Rear PAE Oj o ego 908 069393 0000 oro amp icf o goce 600000000 o m S989308 O5 Pu uu Frequency Counter e n z z QO a a BNC m BNC m Cable e4991ase010 Step 5 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant Chapter 3 133 Adjustment A3 Local Level Adjustment A3 Local Level Adjustment The purpose of this procedure is to adjust
238. r to set the Open Compensation Function in the fixture compensation functions to On Measure the necessary fixture compensation data D Data corrupt or stale Data may be invalid Also a newly reading procedure may have been started but not completed since the most recent access Data out of range A data element well out of the E4991A s defined range but not violating the standard has been received Data type error The parser has recognized a data element that is not supposed to exist For example even though numerical figure or character string data are expected block data have been sent Define the type of recognized data E Execution error An execution error has occurred for which the E4991A could not specify the error message This code shows that an execution error defined in IEEE488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred Exponent too large The absolute figure of the exponent has exceeded 32 000 refer to IEEE488 2 7 2 4 1 Expression data not allowed An expression data element has been received at a position where the E4991A does not allow expression data elements Expression error During structure analysis of the expression data there has been an error that does not apply to a situation between errors 171 and 179 346 Appendix E 256 95 105 224 71 213 161 Messages File name not found F File name not found A designated file could not be found and the command has not been
239. rad 8 87 300 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 14 Q 5 94 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 7 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 40 190 5 19 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 4 84 600 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 800 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 5 52 800 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 240 6 12 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 6 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 24 0 9 74 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad t 4 7 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 0 240 10 51 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 8 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 24 0 11 49 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 4 8 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 07 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 87 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 27 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 3 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 65 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 2 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 8 90 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 3 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 9 19 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 3 mrad 8 87 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 51 Q 9 55 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 3 mrad 8 87 Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 8 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 29 Q 20 13 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 10 3 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 3 dBm
240. re the measurement has been updated sobessan J After changing the setting conditions wait for the measurement to be updated and then read out the statistic analysis results Character data not allowed Character data has been received at a position where the E4991A cannot allow a character data element For example when the program message CALC1 MARK FUNC TARG MAX is sent instead of the correct program message CALC1 MARK FUNC TARG le 12 the character data element is regarded by the E4991A as invalid Refer to the command reference and check the parameter to be used for that command Command error An error has occurred for which the E4991A could not grammatically specify the error message This shows that a command error defined by IEEE488 2 5 1 1 4 has occurred Comp measure aborted During measurement of the necessary fixture compensation data the measurement has been interrupted by the Abort Compen Meas button The fixture compensation data has been invalidated Retry measuring the fixture compensation data if necessary Appendix E 345 11 230 222 104 200 123 178 170 Messages Compensation Required Compensation Required Before finishing the measurement of fixture compensation data a command has been sent to turn the fixture compensation function On For example before measurement of Open Compensation Data has been finished the SENS CORR2 COLL OPEN command has been attempted in orde
241. refix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Included in the analog Interface board Top View Cables amp Other Parts Figure 6 2 Top View Cables amp Other Parts e4991ase023 236 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 2 ES Table 6 2 Top View Cables 8 o Ref Agilent Part Number C D Qty Description g Desig a 1 54801 61611 5 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 2 54801 61610 4 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 3 04396 61707 3 1 CABLE ASSY 4 04287 61607 0 1 FLAT CABLE 5 E5100 61661 1 1 CABLE FLAT 26PIN 6 54801 61636 4 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 7 54801 61635 3 1 WIRE ASSY 8 04287 61609 2 1 FLAT CABLE ASSY 9 04287 61632 1 1 WIRE ASSY 10 04287 61633 2 1 WIRE ASSY 11 E4991 61606 9 1 WIRE ASSY 12 E4991 61605 8 1 RF CABLE ASSY Chapter 6 237 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Top View Miscellaneous Parts Figure 6 3 Top View Miscellaneous Parts
242. ression image of the system files application files and correction constant data The System Backup copies the system files application files and correction constant data in the C drive to the H drive The correction constant data in the C drive and the EEPROM is updated to new data after performing the adjustment at the same time It is necessary to perform the System Backup after performing the adjustment so that the System Recovery can be performed correctly The procedure to perform the System Backup is as follows The System Backup must be performed by manual after performing the Adjustment The Adjustment Program can t perform System Backup How to make a system backup disk Copy the files copydisk exe Backup bin which is downloadable from CTU Kobe web site to the specific directory on the PC Insert a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive of the PC Run the DOS prompt and change the current directory to the specific directory which includes the above two files gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 Perform the following command Then the system backup disk will be made automatically copydisk exe backup bin a System backup Procedure Connect the external keyboard with the E4991A Insert the above system backup disk in the floppy disk drive of the E4991 A Power on E4991A Press F key on the external keyboard as soon as the AMI BIOS System Configuration Display as shown in Figure 3 23 is displayed after RAM countin
243. rnal Test on page 172 adjustments using the A4 Adjustment and A2 Adjustment Opt 001 in Spot Adjustment of the program A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local level Adjustment A4 IF Local AGC Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment A2 DC Bias RC Adjustment System Backup To Execute the External Test on page 189 Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test DC Bias Test AS Frequency Reference Opt 1D5 Perform the following required adjustment using the AS Adjustment in Spot Adjustment of the program A5 Reference Oven Adjustment Frequency Accuracy Test with Option 1D5 A6 Test Head Board Perform the following required adjustments using theA3 Adjustment and A2 Adjustment Opt 001 in Spot Adjustment of the program A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 IF Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment A2 DC Bias Voltage Adjustment A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment A2 DC Bias RC Adjustment System Backup To Execute the External Test on page 189 Power Level Accuracy Test Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test DC Bias Test A10 Analog Motherboard Not Required Inspect the Booting Process When the symptom of failure is out of specification perform the performance test A20 Digital Motherboard Set jumpers and BIOS parameters on the A20 For details see To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix
244. ront Isolation Test Make sure that noting is connected to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 6 Front Isolation on External Test dialog box Connect RF OUT and PORT2 using N Cable and connect the 500hm Termination N to PORTI Then click OK Click OK amp Next gt gt to go to the next test Connect RF OUT and PORT using N Cable and connect the 50ohm Termination N to PORT2 Then click OK Click OK amp Next gt gt to go to the next test 192 Chapter 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting Test Head Test This test is to check if the test head works normally Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B 50 ohm N m N m 61cm Cable 11500B Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the Test Head Test Make sure that noting is connected to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 7 Test Head on External Test dialog box Connect RF OUT and PORTI using N Cable Then click OK Connect RF OUT and PORT2 using N Cable Then click OK Connect the Test Head to the instrument and connect the 500hm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK am
245. rovides the theory of operation ofthe E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information for ordering replacement parts for the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure This chapter provides procedure for removing and replacing the major assemblies in the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer Chapter 8 Post Repair Procedures This chapter lists the procedures required to verify the E4991A operation after an assembly is replaced with a new one Appendix A Manual Changes This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the E4991A manufactured earlier than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to E4991A units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage 18 Chapter 1 General Information Organization of Service Manual This appendix describes how to install the operation system to the A27 mass storage When the operating system in the A27 mass storage has damage you can recover it before replacing the A27 by the following procedure Appendix C Firmware Update This appendix describes how to update the E4991A firmware When you want to update the E4991A firmware refer to this appendix Appendix D Power Requirement
246. rs on the flowcharts point to procedural steps that explain the brief instructions in the chart Primary Trouble Isolation The action in the Primary Trouble Isolation are done without disassembling the E4991A Perform power up About few minutes after the E4991A is turned on the measurement view is displayed on the screen The display on the screen should be similar to the Figure 4 13 G Measurement View on page 166 Check the display If there is no display on the LCD after the E49914 is turned on go to No Display Troubleshooting on page 158 If the E4991A stops in booting process in spite of the anything is displayed on the LCD go to Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 on page 161 or Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY 433 and later on page 168 The power on self test is performed once automatically after the E4991A measurement view is displayed If power on self test fails go to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 172 Check the Basic Function If you find the E4991A s function without measurement part doesn t work correctly go to Function Depend Troubleshooting on page 175 Check the Measurement Function If you find the measurement function doesn t work correctly perform the external test and the performance test When the external test fails go to External Tests Failure Troubleshooting on page 189 When the performance test fails go to
247. s refer to the Operation Manual for E4991A Adjustment Program The operation manual is downloadable from the CTU Kobe web site Adjustment Program Menu The Adjustment Program has the following main menu All Adjustment e Spot Adjustment Write ID EEPROM Initialize All Adjustment All Adjustment executes all adjustments according to the option the E4991A has When you replace the EEPROM on the A21 Analog Interface Board or A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive HDD All Adjustment must be performed All Adjustment consists of the following adjustments e EEPROM Initialize Al VCXO Frequency Adjustment gt 2 c z e E D 5 3 A3 Local Level Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment A4 IF Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment AS Ref Oven Adjustment Opt 1D5 A2DC Bias Voltage Adjustment Opt 001 A2 DC Bias Current Adjustment Opt 001 A2DC Bias R C Adjustment Opt 001 It is necessary to perform the system backup after performing the adjustment so that the system recovery can be performed correctly For details refer to System Backup for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 on page 149 Chapter 3 125 Adjustment Adjustment Program Spot Adjustment Spot Adjustment executes the corresponding adjustment automatically according to replaced each analog board Perform the Spot Adjus
248. s List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Table 6 15 Other Parts Agilent Part Number CD Qty Description E4991 900x0 4 1 OPERATION MANUAL E4991 900x2 6 1 PROGRAMMING MANUAL E4991 901x0 9 1 SERVICE MANUAL E4991 180x0 0 1 SAMPLE PROGRAM SET E4991 900x1 5 1 QUICK START GUIDE E4991 905x0 9 CD ROM manual E4991 16000 2 1 RECOVERY FD 1 00 E4991 16101 4 1 CD ROM SOFTWARE 1 00 1150 7846 6 1 MOUSE PS 2 1150 7970 7 1 KEYBOARD 8710 1766 2 1 TORQUE WRENCH E4991 60021 0 1 SHORT TERMINATION E4991 60022 1 1 OPEN TERMINATION 04287 60021 0 l 50 OHM TERMINATION 2 04287 60022 l 1 LOW LOSS CAPACITOR 16195 60041 8 l CARRYING CASE 16195 90030 8 I OPERATION NOTE 16195B 1 Opt OBW only 2 Included in 16195B Calibration Kit Chapter 6 257 o ps e to e oO o en 6 2 i m n Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix MY433 and later Power Cables and Plug Configurations For details of the power cables and plug configurations refer to Appendix D Power Requirement on page 339 Top View Major Assembly Figure 6 15 Top View Major Assembly
249. s Troubleshooting for serial prefix MY433 and later Figure 4 17 Measurement view Trace 1 E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer LINN TUAE PERDRE NN MALI HIM in Step 4 Power On Self Test The power on self test is executed once automatically before the measurement starts For details refer to Troubleshooting Using Internal Test on page 172 In addition a message of the Internal Test In Progress is displayed during the power on self test in progress If an hang up occurs during the power on self test problem seems in analog block such as Al Reference OSC A3 Source A4 Receiver or A2 DC Bias Opt 001 S 4 e el o 4 0 3 e e 2 Chapter 4 171 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Power On Self Test The E4991A performs the power on self test once after the E4991A is turned on When the failure part is detected in the E4991A a message of the Power on test failed is displayed The content of the power on self test is same as the internal test PLL unlock When phase lock loop doesn t work in the E4991A not Power on test failed but PLL unlock is displayed e Ifyou use the external reference signal Opt 1D5 check to see if it is correct If you use the correct signal or you don t use it there is a possibility to need repair and or adjustment Wh
250. st on page 189 Click 9 Z meas on External Test dialog box Connect the OPEN 0 S Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK amp Next gt gt to go to the next test Connect the SHORT 0 ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK amp Next gt gt to go to the next test Connect the 50 ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK amp Next gt gt to go to the next test 194 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting External Test Failure Troubleshooting When the external test fails replace the faulty assembly as shown in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Troubleshooting Information for External Test Failure x First Failed Test Probable Faulty Assembly o Al Ref A3 A4 A2 DC AS Freq A6 Test OSC Source Reciever Bias 001 Ref 1D5 Head 1 FRONT KEY amp LCD 2 AA Tt Wo Jtt 3 OUTPUT ATT TT TT TT 4 INPUT ATT Tf TT TTT TERN Tt t ttt 6 FRONT ISOLATION TTT 7 TEST HEAD ttt 8 DC BIAS TEST tt 7 deos TT ttt 1 T Tt T tt 1 If FRONT KEY amp LCD test fails verify A22 Front Panel Keyboard A51 LCD A21 Analog Interface Board and A26 Display Board ttt Most suspicious assembly Suspicious assembly There is some possibility of a fault R p o o D 7 y je o 5 Q Chapter 4 195
251. t Step 6 The BIOS setup utility has primary menus most of which have sub menus Brief descriptions and reference pages for these menus are provided in Table 4 13 The details of the BIOS option settings in each menu and sub menus are described on the page listed in the table Step 7 Select a desired menu using gt keys Select a item in the menu or sub menu window using keys To perform an operation use key NOTE If you want to quit the BIOS option setting and exit the BIOS setup utility without saving changes in the setup select Exit Discarding Changes and press key at the Exit Menu Table 4 13 BIOS setup utility primary menus and references Menu Options Ref page Main Product description including processor and on memory fitted page 212 Date and time IDE disks found and sub menus for extra configuration 212 Chapter 4 Table 4 13 NOTE Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later BIOS setup utility primary menus and references Menu Options Ref page Advanced Start up display mode silent boot etc on Operating system type ACPI etc page 214 Advanced chipset configuration Processor cache control PCI space configuration I O devices configuration Advanced hard disk drive options System monitoring Version information Security Passwords and permissions on page 216 Power Action after AC reconnec
252. t For example in the Dielectric Measurement Mode the CALC FORM PAR MGA command has been attempted in order to set the size of the magnetic substance Select Magnetic Material Measurement Mode Permittivity measurement mode only A command that is only valid for Dielectric Measurement Mode has been sent For example in the Magnetic Material Measurement Mode the SENS CORR1 CKIT STAN7 THIC command has been attempted in order to set the thickness of the load standard for Dielectric Measurement Select Dielectric Measurement Mode Printer error The printer has not responded to the control from the E4991A Confirm whether the printer s power is On or Off the connection status of the cable and the paper supply Program mnemonic too long The length of a header has exceeded 12 characters The length of a header here refers to the length of the series of characters that are separated by colons Refer to IEEE488 2 7 6 4 1 for further details Q Query DEADLOCKED This indicates a condition that has created a DEADLOCK Query error refer to IEEE488 2 6 3 1 7 This error occurs for example when both input and output buffers become full and when the E4991A is no longer able to carry out a process Query error The E4991A has found a Query error for which it is not able to specify the error message This code shows that a Query error defined in IEEE488 2 11 5 1 1 7 or 6 3 has occurred Query INTERRPUTED This indicates a condi
253. t is also indicated on the screen after this section is made Remove the system recovery disk and shut down the E4991A by pressing the power switch If you do not have the system recovery disk you can make it by the following procedure 1 Copy the files copydisk exe recover bin which are downloadable from CTU kobe web site internal to specific directory on your PC 2 Insert a floppy disk to the floppy disk drive in your PC 3 Run the DOS prompt and change the current directory to the specific directory which includes the above two files 4 Perform the following command Then the system recovery disk will be made automatically copydisk exe recover bin a Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Procedure to execute system recovery for serial number other than JP1KH or A27 that has been replaced Shut down the E4991A Connect the external keyboard to the E4991A Press the standby switch of the E4991A to turn it on When the message in the figure below appears on the screen following the Agilent s logo screen immediately press R on the keyboard Agilent E4991A iwrz 36Hz RF Imp edance Material Analyzer ll Push R key to enter recovery mode R N e4991aoj221 NOTE Watch the message carefully because after several seconds it will be replaced with the next screen Note that this is automatically done with no key operations Step 5 When Recover Hard disk C drive Y
254. t cable item 1 in Figure 6 2 e A26 to Backlight primary cable item 7 in Figure 6 2 A26to LCD mylar ribbon cable item 4 in Figure 6 2 Remove a torx screw fastening the A26 to the rear panel Remove the A26 Use the following procedure when you handle the mylar ribbon cable The mylar cable and their connector are very fragile To replace to a new mylar cable is recommended when you are instructed to disconnect and connect the mylar cable frequently To disconnect the cable Pry up the retainer slightly at either end of the connector as shown in Figure 7 9 using a small flat blade screwdriver pry up the retainer 4287ase07007 Pull the mylar ribbon cable out of the connector Chapter 7 303 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Replacement Procedure A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small and 2 medium Soldering Iron Procedure Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal Remove the six screws fastening the LCD cover to the front panel Disconnect the flat cable item 8 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 from the A22 Front Panel Keyboard Remove the eight screws fastening the A22 to the front panel Remove the front panel knob to remove the A22 Remove two screws fastening the LED board to the front panel The LED board is connected to the A22 using the four wire
255. t cables are ok replace the A27 E4991A Logo Screen Files of the E4991A logos are in A27 Mass Storage If the logos are displayed the A27 works If the E4991A was turned off without shutdown process Microsoft Scandisk run after E4991A logo is displayed If serious trouble is found in the scan disk reinstall the operating system For details of the system installation refer to Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage on page 313 And if the operating system still doesn t boot properly after reinstallation A27 has to be replaced physically S 4 e a 2 4 0 3 e e Q And you encounter the following problems try to reinstall the operating system before replacing the A27 xxx file is missing is displayed on the DOS screen The E4991A logo screen is not displayed after Searching for Boot Record from IDE 0 OK is displayed Windows always boots with Safe Mode Chapter 4 165 NOTE Figure 4 12 Step 6 Figure 4 13 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 To use the E4991A functions are necessary to install its device drivers to the operating system The Agilent factory installs the necessary device drivers to the E4991A operating system and ship it The operating system checks the necessary device drivers When the operating system doesn t detect them the message box is displayed You need to prepar
256. t number indicate its current edition The printing date changes when a new edition is printed Minor corrections and updates that are incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change The manual part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated December 2001 First Edition April 2003 Second Edition November 2004 Third Edition December 2005 Fourth Edition September 2008 Fifth Edition E4991 90140 NOTE NOTE NOTE NOTE Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific WARNINGS elsewhere in this manual may impair the protection provided by the equipment In addition it violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements The E4991A complies with INSTALLATION CATEGORY II as well as POLLUTION DEGREE 2 in IEC61010 1 The E4991A is an INDOOR USE product The LEDs in the E4991A are Class 1 in accordance with IEC60825 1 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT This equipment is MEASUREMENT CATEGORY I CAT I Do not use for CAT II III or IV This equipment is tested with stand alone condition or with the combination with the accessories supplied by Agilent Technologies against the requirement of the stan
257. t on Power savings modes and timers page 216 Boot Selects device boot order on page 215 Exit Save with or without changes on Load save default settings from flash ROM page 217 Load Setup Defaults Perform the following procedure only when the A20 digital motherboard is replaced Jump to Advanced Menu when you check whether the BIOS options are correctly set or not Exit menu shown below is displayed by choosing Exit using keys and by pressing key at the BIOS Setup Utility main menu Select Load Setup Default using keys The dialog box Setup Comfirmation prompts you to select Y Yes or N No Press LY and Enter to load the manufacture Setup Defaults into the BIOS ROM As a result almost all of the BIOS options are automatically configured to the optimal settings for the E4991A Chapter 4 R p o o D 7 y je o 5 Q 213 Figure 4 46 Figure 4 47 Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later Exit menu for Load Setup Defaults PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility Exit Saving Changes ltem Specific Help Exil Discarding Changes Load Setup Defaults Discard Changes Seve Changes CMOS Restore Condition Never Seve CMOS to Flash Erase CMOS from Flash Restore CMOS from Flesh Helo tl Select herm j Change Values FS Setup Defaults Exit o Select Manu Enter Execute Command F10 Save and Exit
258. te 74 Select the file 40 sta 75 Press Trigger to make a measurement 76 Record the Z and q readings to the calculation sheet 77 Calculate the test result according to the calculation sheet the record it to the performance test record Ignore the reading at 800 MHz 2 2 GHz and 3 0 GHz Chapter 2 41 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test DC Bias Level Accuracy Test Option 001 This test verifies the E4991A s DC bias level accuracy at several level Specification Voltage open terminal 0 1 6 mV Current short terminal 0 2 20 mA Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Multimeter 3458A BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 N m BNC f Adapter 7mm N f Adapter p n 1250 0780 11524A Dual Banana BNC f Adapter p n 1251 2277 Procedure 1 Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 2 11 The BNC f Banana adapter must be connected to voltage measurement connectors with the GND connector connecting to the LO terminal 42 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Figure 2 11 DC Bias Level Accuracy Test voltage Setup N m BNC f Adapter BNC m BNC m Cable 7mm N f Adapter S E4991A db E4001 m Dual Banana to BNC f Adapter f Multimeter o
259. te Shortcut R 4 p 9 en o D 2 P e 9 r Rename 2 te e5070bse110 Chapter 4 177 Troubleshooting Function Depend Troubleshooting Figure 4 21 System Properties Window General System Properties EJ General Network Identification Hardware User page Advanced System Micros ot windows 2000 5002135 Service Pack 4 Registered to m t_insh 51873 0 EM 0007007 00000 Computer x86 Family 6 Model 8 Stepping 10 AT AT COMPATIBLE 261 172 KB RAM 0499 1ase098 Step 3 Click Hardware tab and Device Manager button The operating system detects all the necessary device drivers and displays the device names as shown in Figure 4 22 Figure 4 22 System Properties Window Hardware amp Device Manager ZEE action ve e gt om e2 25 2 HE Agilent devices Computer Disk drives Display adapters Floppy disk controller s Floppy disk drives GPIB Interf aces XX Agilent Technologies 623505 PCI GPIB for Taker Listener IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Keyboards Wice and other pointing devices Monitors Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers SP EE 24991250099 44 j i OTRO GOO U OH HC HC Click the icon with the right button and click Property to show the detail of the status as shown in Figure 4 23 178 Chapter 4 Figure 4 23 Step 1 Step 2 Step
260. tem recovery of the E4991A is complete 318 Appendix B System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later By executing system recovery you can return the system of the E4991A the Windows operating system and the firmware to the factory state at the time of purchase Types of system recoveries The following two types of system recoveries are available o Factory recovery Returns the contents of the C drive to the factory state o User recovery 2 Returns the contents of the C drive to a user specified state To use this function you must prepare for recovery in advance For information on preparation see Procedure to create the user backup image on page 323 for information on the execution Also see Procedure to execute the user recovery function on page 326 Notes on executing system recovery Executing system recovery causes the following o In addition to the Windows operating system and the firmware the following settings of the E4991A are returned to the factory state Network setting GPIB setting Printer setting o The driver for the supported printer installed after purchase is deleted o You need to execute initial registration again Files you created using the save function files in the D drive are not affected but we recommend backing them up before executing system recovery for preca
261. ter BNC m BNC m Cable 7mm N f Adapter Dual Banana to BNC f Adapter Multimeter L Dongo ricrnmrr D Fead Through Termination Test Head e4991ase032 2 Press Preset to preset the E4991A 3 Set the E4991A as follows Setting Operation Frequency 1MHz start stop Center 1 M u Power 15 dBm Source Osc Unit Power Source Osc Level 1 5 Enter 4 Press Trigger Setup 5 Select Trigger Source Manual 6 Press Reset key blue gt to initialize the 3458A then Set it as follows a Press ACV to set the measurement mode to AC voltage b Press S blue N Rdgs Trig U U U to display SETACV c Press gt U U U to display SYNC then press Enter d Press NPLC 1 0 0 Enter 7 Press Trigger to make a measurement 8 Record the multimeter reading to the calculation sheet 9 Calculate the test result according to the calculation sheet then record it to the performance test record 10 Perform zeroing and calibrating the power meter 11 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 4 32 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Performance Test Figure 2 4 Power level Accuracy Test Setup 2 Power Meter
262. the analog test is as follows Table 4 1 Troubleshooting Information for Analog Test Failure Test First Failed Test Test Point Probable Faulty Assembly No Al Ref A3 A4 A2 DC AS5 Freq A6 Test OSC Source Receiver Bias 001 Ref 1D5 Head 1 DC AI P9V 9V on Al TTT 2 DC Al N9V 9V on Al nt 3 DC AI PSVRFI 5V for RFI on Al wit 4 DC_A1_PSVRF2 5V for RF2 on Al tit 5 DC AI PSV 5V on Al tit 6 DC A3 PSVPLL 5V for PLL on A3 ttt 7 DC_A3_P10V 10V on A3 EE 8 DC A3 N5V 5V on A3 9 DC A3 NIOVPLL 10V on A3 HT 10 DC A3 OUTDET Detect Level of RFOUT AGC on A3 FT 11 DC A3 LODET Detect Level of Local AGC on A3 E 12 DC A4 PIOV 10 5V on A4 it 13 DC_A4 PSV 5V on A4 m 14 DC A4 P8VA 8V for CH1 on A4 tH 15 DC A4 P8VB 8V for CH2 on A4 ttt 16 DC A4 N10 5V 10 5V on A4 17 DC A4 NSV 5V on A4 e 18 DC A4 LODET Detect Level of Local AGC on A4 Tf tH 19 A2 STAT Status of A2 LL 20 DC A2 P50V 50V on A2 HH 21 DC A2 N50V 50V on A2 22 DC_A2 PSVREF 5V for Reference on A2 itt 23 FREQ Al VCOI VCO Output for RF1 on Al tH 24 FREQ Al REFI PLL Reference for RF1 on Al tH 25 FREQ Al VCO2 VCO Output for RF2 on Al ttt 26 FREQ_A1_REF2 PLL Reference for RF2 on A1 tit Chapter 4 173 R o o D E y je o e 5 Q Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Using Internal Test Table 4 1 Trou
263. the function test is listed on Table on page 21 Use only calibrated equipment when doing the performance test or the function test for the E4991A NOTE The followings are indispensable to do the performance test The service center must receive the following from the customer Agilent E4991A e 16195B 7 mm Calibration Kit Furnished Accessory for E4991A Standard Test Head Furnished Accessory for E4991A Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit if the E4991A has Option 007 If the E4991A has the Option 007 Temperature Characteristic Test Kit you have to do the performance tests for the Option 007 using the Option 007 kit in addition to all the performance tests for standard E4991A Option 010 Test Head including 1 m extension cable 1f the E4991A has Option 010 If the E4991A has the Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit you have to do the performance tests for the Option 010 using the Option 010 Test Head in addition to all the performance tests for standard E4991A 24 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test How to Set the E4991A for Maintenance How to Set the E4991A for Maintenance This section provides procedure to set the E4991A in the performance test and function test This contains a set of keys that are used to move the cursor across the display or enter numeric values 9 rotary knob DOCS key arrow keys key click key WL key numeric keys JE key
264. ti 192 Front Isolation Test nk Pes Stat ay Saha Set foe Mae ne Sear ge RR TR 192 Test Head Test icc cco td PGE OC ias tebe ated ate ZEE 193 DC Bias Test Option 001 only beroren epr oree rerea r auer errep OSPEA rn 193 Z Meas R tet teh SA iva A Ree eh e dee 194 External Test Failure Troubleshooting wawa aaa tenet nent enna 195 Performance Tests Failure Troubleshooting aaa aaa n 196 Troubleshooting for Performance Test Failure nu uununeur raunar 196 11 Contents To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 197 To Identify the Motherboard Used 197 Configure the Motherboard lisse 198 To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options eh 200 To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later 210 To Identify the Motherboard Installed uuuaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaa I 210 Configure the Motherboard e A 210 Testing DRAM on the Motherboard e 210 To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options ee 211 5 Theory of Operation Overall Instrument Operation a REY e eg 220 Digtal SECHOM a nsus PE PEEP dok eed ds oat 223 A20 Digital Motherboard for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 1 223 A20 Digital Motherboard for serial prefix MY433 and later 0 0 eee eee eee 223 A21 Analog Interface Board iii dien i era Hidde ed aoe bana shoes Haag EU 223 A22 Front Pane
265. ties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel 2409 1 ase135 Step 8 Install the new version of the firmware using the following procedure 1 Double Click E4991 msi icon The E4991A Setup Wizard will start automatically as shown in Figure C 4 Click on the Next to continue the firmware installation on the E4991A Setup Wizard as shown in Figure C 4 Click on the Next to start the firmware installation on Confirm Installation window After the disk1 installation is finished insert the firmware installation disk2 2 of 3 into the FDD of the E4991A then click OK After the disk2 installation 1s finished insert the firmware installation disk3 3 of 3 into the FDD of the E4991A then click OK Click on the Close to exit on the Installation Complete window 336 Appendix C Firmware Update Firmware Update Figure C 4 E4991A Setup Wizard ie 49914 O m 3 S 9 E ko on D 9 Welcome to the E4991A Setup Wizard Agilent Technologies The installer will guide you through the steps required to install E49914 on your computer Click Next to continue WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it ma
266. tility Run the BIOS setup utility Use the external keyboard to select and set various options in the BIOS setup utility Do not operate the E4991A front panel until you exit the BIOS option setup procedure Connect the external keyboard to the E4991A rear panel connector Turn the instrument on Press F2 key as soon as the splash screen as shown in Figure 4 15 is displayed Wait a few Chapter 4 211 R p o je a D 7 y e e e 5 Q Troubleshooting To Configure the A20 Digital Motherboard and BIOS for serial prefix MY433 and later seconds until the message Enter CURRENT Password appears Step 4 Press key The LED in the key lights Step 5 Enter password e4991a and press Enter J Then BIOS setup utility main menu is displayed as shown in Figure 4 45 Figure 4 45 BIOS setup utility main menu Man Advanced Security Power Bcot Exit System Time 09 00 00 Item Specific Help System Date 01 20 01 CPU Type Celeron TM Tab lt Shift Tab gt or CPU Speed Cala Enter selects field System Memory 253MB Extended Memory Date is in US format Legacy Diskette A 1 44 1 25MB 3 ie mmidd yyyy Legacy Diskette B Disabled b Primary Master 40021MB gt Primary Slave foei K Secondary Master Nono b Secondary Slave None gt Keyboard Features Fi Help fj Selectltem Change Values F9 Setup Defaults ESC Exit Select Menu Enter Select Sub Menu F10 Save and Exi
267. tion that has created an INTERRUPTED Query error refer to IEEE488 1 6 3 2 3 This error is generated when for example the data byte DAB or Get is received after the Query but before its response is fully sent Query UNTERMINATED This indicates a condition that has created an UNTERMINATED Query error refer to IEEE488 1 6 3 3 2 This error occurs when the E4991A is designated as a talker if designated as a controller data transmission is possible via the interface and receives 352 Appendix E 440 105 104 118 221 150 158 138 Messages Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response incomplete program messages For example when a command that does not require a Query such as CLS has been sent as CLS it is regarded as an incomplete message by the E4991A Check the command reference Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response This indicates that a query has been received in the same program message after a query requesting an indefinite response has been executed refer to IEEE488 2 6 5 7 5 7 R Recall error An error has occurred during reading out recall of a file For example this occurs when an attempt is made to read out a file containing invalid data such as the extension sta for instrument state files that were saved with equipment other than the E4991A Confirm that there is no problem in the file contents S Save error While saving a file an error has be
268. tment Setup E4991A H EEE l Jy B on Dm Open or Short or 502 4 Test Head e4991ase018 Step 4 Follow the adjustment program instruction to update the correction constant Chapter 3 141 gt 2 c 0 e E D 5 3 Adjustment A5 Reference Oven Adjustment Opt 1D5 only A5 Reference Oven Adjustment Opt 1D5 only The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the 10MHz high stability reference oscillator Option 1D5 frequency Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Frequency Counter 53181A Opt 010 and 030 53131A Opt 010 and 030 or 53132A Opt 010 and 030 Frequency Standard 5071A or 5061B BNC m BNC m Cable 61 cm p n 8120 1839 BNC m BNC m Cable 122cm p n 8120 1840 Procedure Step 1 Run the adjustment program Step 2 Choose the A5 Adjustment Opt 1D5 in the Spot Adjustment It is possible to perform this item with the All Adjustment too Step 3 Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 3 16 142 Chapter 3 Adjustment A5 Reference Oven Adjustment Opt 1D5 only Figure 3 16 A5 Reference Oven Adjustment Setup Frequency Standard E4991A Rear TO EXT REF INPUT o o
269. tment when the analog board such as A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 or A6 board is replaced For example if you replace or adjustment only A board perform only A1 Adjustment For details refer to Table 3 2 on page 124 Spot Adjustment consists of the following adjustments Al Adjustment If you replace or adjust Al Board perform Al Adjustment only The A1 Adjustment consists of the following adjustments Al VCXO Frequency Adjustment A3 Local Level Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment AA IF Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment A3 Adjustment If you replace or adjust A3 Board or the Standard Test Head perform A3 Adjustment only The A3 Adjustment consists of the following adjustments A3 Local Level Adjustment A3 Output AGC Gain Adjustment A3 Output Level Adjustment A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment AA IF Gain Adjustment Default Cal Coefficient Adjustment NOTE If your instrument has an option 001 A2 DC Bias perform A2 Adjustment after performing the A3 Adjustment A4 Adjustment If you replace or adjust A4 Board perform A4 Adjustment only The A4 Adjustment consists of the following adjustments A4 Local AGC Gain Adjustment A4 Local Level Adjustment AA IF Gain Adjustment 126 Chapter 3 Adjustment Adjustment Program De
270. ty For details of the BIOS options the E4991A is specified refer to To Confirm or Set the BIOS Options on page 200 to set the system date and time to change the first boot device if you want to boot from floppy disk it is necessary to change it to confirm the BIOS options 162 Chapter4 Troubleshooting Booting Process Troubleshooting for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Figure 4 8 B BIOS Logo and RAM Counting um cs Megatrends AMIBIOS C 1997 American Megatrends Inc Agilent Technologies E4991 6 1 futo Detecting Pri Haster IDE Hard Disk Puto Detecting Pri Slave Press lt ESC gt to abort_ C American Megatrends Inc 52 8100 809999 88101111 871595 nMIBIOS nPCTX8080 8 Step 3 System Configuration The BIOS checks the E4991A configuration and displays it shown in as Figure 4 9 Three PCI boards A21 A25 and A26 can be confirmed like below e PCI Slot 1 Ethernet is A25 LAN board e PCI Slot 2 VGA is A26 Display board e PCI Slot 3 Unknown Device is A21 Analog Interface board If the BIOS couldn t detect above boards caused by hardware problem or poor connection nothing is displayed there In addition the BIOS can not check the operation of the above boards When nothing is displayed there doubt first whether a PCI slot connection is poor or not But A24 GPIB board can t be confirmed because it is on the ISA slots S 4 p 9 el o 4 0 3 9 e
271. uS 6 16 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y us 126 uS 5 55 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y uS 140 uS 5 66 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y uS 156 uS 5 73 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y uS 171 uS 5 86 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y us 186 uS 6 04 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y us 205 uS 6 14 Short Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result TOR 1 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 3 1 mQ 10 09 10 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 3 6 mQ 9 79 100 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 15 mQ 5 70 200 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 26 mQ 5 16 300 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 31 mQ 5 97 500 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 51 mQ 5 58 600 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 51 mQ 6 57 800 MHz 3 dBm Z mQ 51 mQ 8 56 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 51 mQ 10 57 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 6 79 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 8 29 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 101 mQ 9 28 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 5 15 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 5 64 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 6 15 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 6 64 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Z mQ 201 mQ 7 14 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Iz mQ 201 mQ 7 65 Standard 500 Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result e oe FAR ncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 51 1 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 09 Q 5 60 10 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 3 dBm Z 0 09 QO 6 39 100 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 1 7 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 11Q 6 54 200 MHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 m
272. udden change in impedance caused by removing the DUT or some other reason during measurement Do not remove the DUT during measurement If this error occurs frequently during normal measurement there may be instrument failure 356 Appendix E Messages Cal done Messages indicating the results or current status of processing Cal done Calculation and storage of a calibration coefficient completed Cal measure aborted Measurement of calibration data aborted Comp done Calculation and storage of a fixture compensation coefficient completed Comp measure aborted Measurement of a fixture compensation coefficient aborted Peak not found Peak search function executed but no defined peak was found Target value not found Target search function executed but no target measurement value was found Trigger hold Measurement is in hold mode in which a trigger is not accepted Wait measuring cal standard Calibration data are now being measured Wait measuring comp standard sobessan J Fixture compensation data are now being measured Appendix E 357 Messages Wait measuring comp standard 358 Appendix E REGIONAL SALES AND SUPPORT OFFICES For more information about Agilent Technologies test and measurement products applications services and for a current sales office listing visit our web site http www agilent com find tmdir You can also contact one of the following centers and ask for a test and
273. uiyoums os JeMOd Jamod sng euy mano jeg ul mdu joy Pg paren d sng euy sar uondo uano PH Y uoo erx oy l 100 uondo pa seig 9d zv I sng euy yoojg Bojeuy Jexeeds pIeoqAsy 1u013 ZZY Gm id 3910 Qe Esm FH yous JEMOd yuold Alquiassy ZZY eoepeju JUOJH uen AZL uen AC gt 3 o o a w c o peog 3 1 Bojeuy Lzy jeseM O IeMod 19d t JeDBu 1x3 yoolg jey iq ZWOOD LWOD suod lenas uoddns on 26098816674 AE e or J9M0d XLV 097 Lev 1uBiproeg 10 JeyeAu ZGY EZ dS GH ZZv p1eog lod VIA Joyo IEHBIQ OZY Jeo Tq PI s 8 aldo rev Sd5 pulses Sora asnow pieoghsy z Sd Ld Hod eieied asn Lasn WEJDEIQ 49018 WSISAS Y 1662 IUSIIDY Chapter 5 222 Theory of Operation Digital Section Digital Section A20 Digital Motherboard for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 A20 digital motherboard provides basic system control and interface functions for the instrument It contains a CPU ROM for BIOS 128MBytes RAM USB interface keyboard and mouse interfaces and interfaces to PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect and ISA Industry Standard Architecture buses A20 Digital Motherboard for serial prefix MY433 and later A20 digital motherboard provides basic system control and interface functions for the instrument It contains a CPU ROM for BIOS 256MBytes RAM USB interfa
274. ulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 7 Replacement Procedure and Chapter 8 Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustment 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from its power supply CAUTION Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap 284 Chapter 7 Table 7 1 Required Tools Replacement Procedure Required Tools The following tools are required for repair of E4991A Required Tools Tool Size Purpose Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 2 medium Outer Cover Removal A1 A2 A3 A4 Board Removal A10 Analog Motherboard Removal A22 Front Panel Keyboard Removal A51 LCD Removal A52 Inverter Board Removal pt size 1 small A1 A2 A3 A4 Board Removal A5 Reference Oven Board Removal A10 Analog Motherboard Removal A20 Digital Motherboard Removal A27 Mass Storage Removal A28 FDD Removal
275. unction Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline with Short Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 40 dBm Z 0 151 W W 0 007 W 1338 0 mrad mrad 89 7 mrad 10 MHz 40 dBm 0 168 W W 0 008 w q 156 2 mrad mrad 13 7 mrad 100 MHz 40 dBm 0 33 W W 0 04w 31 6 mrad mrad 2 7 mrad 200 MHz 40 dBm 0 63 W w 0 07w 28 4 mrad mrad 3 1 mrad 300 MHz 40 dBm 0 99 W W 0 12W q 27 2 mrad mrad 3 0 mrad 500 MHz 40 dBm 2 69 W W 0 31 W 30 9 mrad mrad 3 6 mrad 600 MHz 40 dBm 6 16 W W 0 78 W 39 6 mrad mrad 5 1 mrad 1 0 GHz 40 dBm 3 27 W W 0 45W q 38 0 mrad mrad 5 3 mrad 1 3 GHz 40 dBm 1 45 W W 0 19w 65 8 mrad mrad 8 3 mrad 1 6 GHz 40 dBm 1 25 W W 0 12W 115 0 mrad mrad 10 9 mrad 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 2 31 W W 0 31 W q 63 1 mrad mrad 8 4 mrad 2 0 GHz 40 dBm 7 68 W W 0 92 W 87 6 mrad mrad 10 5 mrad 2 4 GHz 40 dBm 16 23 W W 2 06 W 107 3 mrad mrad 13 7 mrad 2 6 GHz 40 dBm 5 22 W W 0 74 W q 95 0 mrad mrad 13 4 mrad 100 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 8 GHz 40 dBm vA 2 82 W W 0 30 W q 128 4 mrad mrad
276. unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit Never turn off the power during the create user backup image because doing so may cause serious damage to the E4991A The create user backup image will be complete in about 5 minutes When the create user backup image is complete the message as shown below appears Press cti J t J and la of the keyboard at the same time to restart Remove the disk and Press CLT ALT DEL to restart your system Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor Appendix B 325 9B8J0 S SSEW ZZY W LD lt E o oO 3 EJ a e y D ct e 3 o NOTE NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 e5061buj034 NOTE System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later Procedure to execute the user recovery function Returns the contents of the C drive to a user specified state To use this function you must create the user backup image in advance For more information see the description Procedure to create the user backup image on page 323 This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is IG201 or hig
277. up complete condition System backup can be suspended without execution by pressing N instead of Y Step 5 A gt is also indicated on the screen after this section is made Remove the system backup Chapter 3 151 Adjustment System Backup for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 disk and shut down the E4991A by pressing the power switch 152 Chapter 3 R 4o p o o D 7 y je o 5 Q Troubleshooting This chapter provides procedure to isolate the failure assembly in the E4991A RF Impedance Material Analyzer 153 Troubleshooting Introduction Introduction WARNING These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from its power supply CAUTION Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap CAUTION Do NOT operate without following instructions Programs or files in the instrument may be broken 154 Chapter 4 Sy Step 1 Step 2 Figure 4 1 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Troubleshooting How to exit from the E4991A Measurement View How to exit from the E4991A Measurement Vi
278. ur local Agilent sales office Addresses and telephone numbers are located in a separate document shipped with the manuals 232 Chapter 6 Replaceable Parts Exchange Assemblies Exchange Assemblies o ps e 9 o e oO o en 6 2 o pan n Under the rebuilt exchange assembly program certain factory repaired and tested assemblies are available on a trade in basis These assemblies are offered al lower cost than a new assembly but meet all factory specifications required of a new assembly The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt exchange assembly program Any spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number Chapter 6 233 Replaceable Parts Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Replaceable Parts List for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY 432 Power Cables and Plug Configurations For details of the power cables and plug configurations refer to Appendix D Power Requirement on page 339 Top View Major Assembly Figure 6 1 Top View Major Assembly
279. ure The following is the procedure to perform the Input ATT Test Connect the Test Head to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 4 Input ATT on External Test dialog box Connect the 50ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Click OK amp Next to go to the next test Chapter 4 191 R o o D 7 y je o 5 Q Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Troubleshooting External Tests Failure Troubleshooting IF Gain Test This test is to check if the IF Gain IF 12 5kHz 10kHz on A4 Board works normally Required Equipment Description Recommended Model Calibration Kit 16195B 50 ohm Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the IF Gain Test Connect the Test Head to the instrument Open the External Test dialog box as described in To Execute the External Test on page 189 Click 5 IF Gain on External Test dialog box Connect the 50ohm Termination of the 16195B to DUT Port on the Test Head Then click OK Front Isolation Test This test is to isolate PORT1 and PORT2 on A4 Board Required Equipment Description Recommended Model 50 ohm Termination N HP 909C Opt 012 N m N m 61cm Cable 11500B Procedure The following is the procedure to perform the F
280. urement signal through RF OUT port to A6 test head and a local signal to A4 receiver board A3 source board also supplies a DC bias voltage which is generated by A2 DC bias board Opt 001 through RF OUT port to A6 test head VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator frequency varies from 2305 MHz to 4152 MHz and it is mixed with RF2 signal to produce the measurement frequency 1MHz to 3GHz The relationship of the VCO frequency and measurement frequency is shown in Table 5 2 After the mixing the signal is filtered with a selectable BPF Band Pass Filter or a LPF Low Pass Filter to eliminate the unwanted harmonics and spurious Chapter 5 227 e Z 0 e es lt 9 9 e jo 4 ien w e 5 Theory of Operation Analog Section Table 5 2 VCO and measurement frequencies for each band Measurement Frequency VCO Frequency Bandl 1 MHz 1739 9 MHz 2305 MHz 4043 9 MHz Band2 1740 MHz 2259 9 MHz 2892 MHz 3411 9 MHz Band3 2260 MHz 2679 9 MHz 3412 MHz 3831 9 MHz Band4 2680 MHz 3000 MHz 3832 MHz 4152 MHz The filtered signal goes through an attenuator variable from 0 dB to 35 dB in 5 dB steps and is output to RF Out port Attenuation is controlled depending on the output power setting as shown in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Output Attenuator Nominal Setting of Output Attenuator Output Power Level on A3 7 9 dBm 1 dBm 0 dB 12 9 dBm 8 dBm 5 dB 17 9 dBm
281. utes before you execute any of the adjustments Required Equipment Table 1 1 lists the equipment required to perform the Adjustment procedures described in this chapter Use only calibrated test equipment when adjusting the E4991A The followings are indispensable to perform the adjustment The service center must receive the following from the customer Agilent E4991A 16195B 7 mm Calibration Kit Furnished Accessory for E4991A Standard Test Head Furnished Accessory for E4991A If the E4991A has an Option 010 Probe Station Connection Kit you have to perform the adjustment using the Standard Test Head only 118 Chapter 3 Adjustment Preparation for using the Adjustment Program Preparation for using the Adjustment Program The Adjustment must be performed using the Adjustment Program To use the Adjustment Program some preparation is required This section describes how to its procedure Required Controller The following controller system is required to run the adjustment program Windows PC PC AT Compatible RAM 64MBytes CPU Pentium 200 MHz or faster OS Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Software Agilent VEE 5 0x or 6 0x GPIB Card 82350A 82340B 82341C D Installing a GPIB Card 82340B 82341C D or 82350A Install a GPIB Card into your computer see the GPIB Card manual The select code of the GPIB Card should be set to 7 Installing Agilent VEE for Personal Com
282. utionary purposes For more information on backup refer to Making Backup Files as described in E4991A User s Guide 1 If the hard disk failed and has been replaced after purchase the state when the replacement was performed is recovered 2 This function is available when the volume label on the hard disk is IG201 or higher 9BEJ0 S SSEW ZZY W LD lt E o oO 3 EJ a e y D ct e 3 o Appendix B 319 NOTE Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later Procedure to execute system recovery You need the keyboard for this operation Shut down the E4991A Connect the keyboard to the E4991A Insert the disk for the system recovery which is furnished with the E49914 into the floppy disk drive of the E4991A Press the standby switch of the E4991A to turn it on When the screen as shown in the figure below appears press and hold s of the keyboard until this screen disappears 3 a Agilent Technologies starting il usse mE 26 e5061buj034 NOTE After several seconds the next screen appears automatically even if you do not press any key so do not miss it If the above message does not appear the instrument is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 320 Appendix B
283. ve Assembly Lauaeaeaaaaaawawawa e 279 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly LLauauaaaaaawawawa wawa t eee n ete nene 280 Power Supply Assembly ul veu eo thot ia 281 Other Parts spas he Ree AA A SL SLE AA lk 282 7 Replacement Procedure Replacing an Assembly 4 ise A a 284 Required Tools osc csi ROSE OR a URP S E EN MEE 285 Outer Cover Removals aria hb etu a UU bane teas aT E hale Pi 286 Tools Required ti DEUS 286 Proced ie NR 286 Front Panel Removal ici A OO AAAA KE PEEK 287 Tools Required crias talas Paes 287 Proceduie iux A A AS AA toto e aee epee 287 A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 288 Tools Required oium ARR eR EG IAE RENE AT REY UI ERR uw ed 288 Procedure stropi ein Stt e A ME Vie eh eatis xu bI S 288 A50 Power Supply Assembly Removal for serial prefix MY433 and later 1 289 Tools Required sy noh v OUEST SVEDESE ORIS 289 Procedure ERE RR PIER CORP PECORI NUR KI MEER MERGE Pd 289 A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly Removal 290 Tools Required eripe epe eu ev E ENSURE HERR NE lt 290 Procedure iraro POZY NOA POW pepper erba tree cci trade repe Em 290 A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Removal 291 Tools Required sspe 432 e 291 lunii m CLERUM 291 A20 Digital Motherboard Removal for serial prefix JPIKH JP2KH and MY432 292 Tools Required zi xod RR eR RR Sea dio up ee URP RO geese ere UN PU E UR i 292 PIrOCEdUTE
284. ve message does not appear the instrument or the disk for the system recovery is at fault contact your local Agilent customer center listed at the end of this manual or distributor 9B8J0 S SSEW ZZY W LD lt E o oO 3 EJ a e y D ct e 3 o Appendix B 327 Step 8 Step 9 CAUTION Step 10 NOTE System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix MY433 and later The message as shown below appears Press of the keyboard If you want to cancel the user recovery press E here You chose to recover your own system backup image file WARNING Press C to Continue only if you are sure that you want to proceed The C partition will be completely overwritten with no chance of recovering any data Use Option 3 to recover the system from a serious malfunction caused by corrupted or inadvertently deleted files on the system s primary C partition Press C to Continue or E to Exit The message as shown below appears Press C of the keyboard to start the user recovery If you want to cancel the user recovery press E here CAUTION Interrupting this process may leave the system in an unstable state Allow the software to complete the backup and recovery process This may take up to 20 minutes depending on the system configuration Press C to Continue or E to Exit Never turn off the power during the system recovery because doing so may cause serious dam
285. vel Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 010 Q 10 74 1 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 68 1 mrad 8 87 10 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 011 Q 10 84 10 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 8 87 100 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 03 Q 9 41 100 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 2 9 mrad 8 87 200 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 07 2 7 69 200 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 300 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 12Q0 7 35 300 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 0 mrad 8 87 500 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 310 7 31 500 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 3 6 mrad 8 87 600 MHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 80 Q 6 52 600 MHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 5 1 mrad 8 87 1 0 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 45 0 6 29 1 0 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 8 87 1 3 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 190 7 61 1 3 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 3 mrad 8 87 1 6 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 120 10 07 1 6 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 11 0 mrad 8 87 1 8 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 31Q 7 32 1 8 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 8 87 2 0 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 92 Q 8 20 2 0 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 10 4 mrad 8 87 2 4 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 2 06 Q 7 65 2 4 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 6 mrad 8 87 2 6 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 740 6 98 2 6 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 4 mrad 8 87 2 8 GHz 40 dBm Z Q 0 300 9 23 2 8 GHz 40 dBm 0 mrad 13 7 mrad 8 87 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies Change 10 Change the Measurement Uncertainty value of DC Bias Test Option 001 amp Option 010 Page 88 to the following information and appended TAR to this report DC Bias Test Option 001 amp Option 010
286. ver as described in Outer Cover Removal Step 2 Disconnect all cables item 6 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 connected to the mass storage disk drive Step 3 Remove four screws item in Figure 7 4 fastening the mass storage disk drive assembly to the chassis Figure 7 4 Mass Storage Disk Drive Assembly 4287ase07004 Step 4 Slide the assembly toward rear side and lift it Step 5 Disassemble the mass storage disk drive as shown in Figure 6 13 on page 255 Step 6 Install the new mass storage disk drive Then recovery the backuped files if you backuped the user files Install the latest firmware if it is not installed in the mass storage disk drive 290 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 NOTE Replacement Procedure A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Removal A28 FDD Floppy Disk Drive Removal Tools Required e Pozidriv screwdriver pt size 1 small Torx screwdriver T15 Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the front panel as described in Front Panel Removal Remove four screws fastening the side panel on the
287. w numeric data elements For example when the program message CALC1 FORM 3 has been sent instead of the correct program message CALC1 FORM RS the numeric data element is received by E49914 as invalid Refer to the command reference and confirm which parameter should be used for a particular command O Option not installed Because a particular option has not been installed the sent command has been ignored For example when the option 001 DC bias function is not installed the SOUR VOLT OFFS command has been attempted in order to set up the DC bias voltage values Please contact your nearest Agilent Technologies branch office or the company where you purchased the instrument install the necessary options Out of memory There is a shortage of memory RAM P Parameter not allowed Appendix E 351 73 72 22 112 430 400 410 420 Messages Permeability measurement mode only The parameters have exceeded the number necessary for a command For example when the program message SWE TYPE LIN SEGM is sent instead of the proper program message SWE TYPE LIN 2 parameters are sent even though only 1 parameter is required for this command Therefore the number of parameters is regarded as invalid by the E4991A Refer to the command reference and check the number of parameters required Permeability measurement mode only A command that is only valid for Magnetic Material Measurement Mode has been sen
288. wdriver pt size 2 medium where Pozidriv screws are in use TORX screwdriver T15 T10 T20 where TORX screws are in use Removal Procedure Refer to Figure 7 8 for this procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Remove the TORX T15 screw item 1 fastening the card to the rear panel Lift the A24 GPIB Card Be careful not to injure the digital mother board and the cable connected the display board to the front assembly A24 GPIB Card Removal Chapter 7 301 m m e 9 o e 6 3 oO 7 2 B x e e oO on E oO Replacement Procedure A24 GPIB Card Replacement for serial prefix MY433 and later Replacement Procedure Replace the new A24 GPIB card by inverse procedure of removal 302 Chapter 7 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 NOTE Step 1 Figure 7 9 Step 2 Replacement Procedure A26 Display Board Removal A26 Display Board Removal Tools Required e Torx screwdriver T15 Procedure Remove the outer cover as described in Outer Cover Removal Disconnect the following cables from the A26 Display board A26 to Floppy mylar ribbon cable item 5 in Figure 6 2 on page 236 e A26 to A27 Mass Storage Disk Drive flat cable item 6 in Figure 6 2 N Az D o D O O 3 O T T O je o p o A26 to A20 Digital Motherboard floppy flat cable item 2 in Figure 6 2 e A26 to A20 IDEI fla
289. xecute the External Test on page 189 CPU 400MHz Not Required Inspect the Booting Process DIMM 64Mbyte Not Required Inspect the Booting Process EEPROM on the Write ID Serial No and Option No Inspect the Booting Process Set EEPROM Initialize Perform the all Performance Tests All Adjustments System Backup 310 gt i D e 2 a D n Manual Changes This appendix contains the information required to adapt this manual to versions or configurations of the E4991A manufactured earlier than the current printing date of this manual The information in this manual applies directly to E4991A units with the serial number that is printed on the title page of this manual 311 Manual Changes Manual Changes a Manual Changes To adapt this manual to your E4991A refer to Table A 1 and Table A 2 Table A 1 Manual Changes by Serial Number Serial Prefix or Number Make Manual Changes Table A 2 Manual Changes by Firmware Version Version Make Manual Changes Agilent Technologies uses a two part ten character serial number that is stamped on the serial number plate Figure A 1 The first five characters are the serial prefix and the last five digits are the suffix Figure A 1 Serial Number Plate Example Agilent Technologies Made In Malaysia E4991A MY12345678 e4991aoj6001 312 AppendixA System Installation for A27 Mass Storage This app
290. y result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law 2499 1a0 156 Step 9 Shutdown the E4991A by the following procedure 1 Click Start Shut Down 2 Click the Shut down button in the Shut Down Windows dialog box to select it 3 Click the OK button Step 10 Turn on the E4991A and then click System About E4991A Confirm the firmware revision you have just installed Appendix C 337 Firmware Update Firmware Update 338 Appendix C U S 9 ES o Ko 3 9 2 Power Requirement 339 Power Requirement Preparation for Power Supply Preparation for Power Supply Before turning on power to the equipment be sure to verify the following Power Requirements The E4991A requires the following power source Requirements Voltage 90 to 132 VAC or 198 to 264 VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption 350 VA WARNING Switched automatically by the E4991A in conformity to the voltage Power Cable In accordance with international safety standards this instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power outlet this cable grounds the instrument frame The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on country of destination Refer to Figure D 1 for the part numbers of the power cables available For protection
291. yed after RAM counting Figure B 1 AMIBIOS System Configuration Display AMIBIOS System Configuration C 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Main Processor AMD K6 2 400 Base Memory Size 640KB Math Processor Built In Ext Memory Size 64512KB Floppy Drive A 144 MB 3 15 Display Type VGA EGA Floppy Drive B None Serial Port s 3F8 2F8 AMIBIOS Date 07 15 95 Parallel Port s 378 External Cache 512KB Disabled Power Management APM SMI ATA PI Device s Type Size LBA 32Bit Block PIO Mode Mode Mode Mode Primary Master Hard Disk 8064MB LBA Off 16Sec 4 PCI Devices PCI Onboard Bridge Device PCI Onboard USB Controller IRQ9 PCI Onboard IDE PCI Slot 1 Ethernet IRQ10 PCI Slot 2VGA PCI Slot 3 Unknown Device IRQ11 e4991ase069 The contents of the system recovery disk are loaded while Figure B 2 is displayed After a short time the system recovery start screen as shown in Figure B 3 is displayed eBeJojS SSEW ZZY W 6 lt E o oO 3 EJ a e y D ct e 3 o Appendix B 315 System Installation for A27 Mass Storage System Recovery for serial prefix JP1KH JP2KH and MY432 Figure B 2 Searching File Display AMIBIOS System Configuration C 1985 1997 American Megatrends Inc Main Processor AMD K6 2 400 Base Memory Size 640KB Math Processor Built In Ext Memory Size 64512KB Floppy Drive A 1 44 MB 372 Display Type VGA EGA Floppy Drive B
292. z 2 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 25 dBm 1 GHz 2 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 74 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Power Level Frequency Test Limit Test Result Measurement Uncertainty 30 dBm 10 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 22 dB 35 dBm 2 GHz 3 00 dB dB 0 24 dB 40 dBm 100 MHz 2 00 dB dB 0 27 dB Chapter 2 75 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D n pue 1991 soueuwouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Impedance Measurement Accuracy Test Standard Open Averaging 8 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 1 MHz 3 dBm 5 13 mS mS 0 61 mS 10 MHz 3 dBm Y 6 26 mS mS 0 46 mS 100 MHz 3 dBm Y 17 6 mS mS 3 3 mS 200 MHz 3 dBm Y 31 4 mS mS 6 5 mS 300 MHz 3 dBm Y 44 7 mS mS 9 8 mS 500 MHz 3 dBm Y 72 mS mS 17 mS 600 MHz 3 dBm Y 95 mS mS 21 mS 800 MHz 3 dBm Y 127 mS mS 28 mS 1 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 161 mS mS 35 mS 1 3 GHz 3 dBm Y 284 mS mS 46 mS 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Y 362 mS mS 61 mS 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Y 420 mS mS 69 mS 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 689 mS mS 126 mS 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Y 781 mS mS 140 mS 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Y 881 mS mS 155 mS 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Y 99 mS mS 171 mS 2 8 GHz 3 dBm Y 1111 mS mS 186 mS 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Y 1244 mS mS 203 mS 76 Chapter 2 Perform
293. z 3 dBm 0 58 W W 0 11 W 11 5 mrad mrad 2 2 mrad 300 MHz 3 dBm 0 65 W W 0 14w q 13 0 mrad mrad 2 7 mrad 500 MHz 3 dBm 0 80 W W 0 19w 16 0 mrad mrad 3 7 mrad 600 MHz 3 dBm 1 08 W W 023W 21 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 800 MHz 3 dBm 1 23 W W 023W q 24 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 1 0 GHz 3 dBm 1 38 W W 023W 27 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 1 3 GHz 3 dBm 2 25 W W 0 24W 45 0 mrad mrad 4 7 mrad 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 2 48 W W 0 24W q 49 5 mrad mrad 4 8 mrad 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 2 63 W W 0 24 W 52 5 mrad mrad 4 6 mrad 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 4 02 W W 0 51 W 80 5 mrad mrad 10 1 mrad 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 4 17 W W 0 51 W q 83 5 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 78 Chapter 2 Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Limit Test Result Measurement Parameter Uncertainty 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 32 W W 0 51W 86 5 mrad mrad 10 1 mrad 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 47 W W 0 51W 89 5 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 2 8 GHz 3 dBm 4 62 W W 0 53 W 92 5 mrad mrad 10 2 mrad 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z 4 77 W w 0 53 w q 95 5 mrad mrad 10 9 mrad Chapter 2 79 mn Cc 2 e pur e 2 D U pue 1991 soueuouad Z Performance Test and Function Test Test Record Standard 10 cm Airline wit
294. z 3 dBm 0 mrad 5 2 mrad 5 51 1 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 72 Q 5 83 1 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 4 mrad 5 86 1 8 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 29Q 6 88 1 8 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 8 5 mrad 6 92 2 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 10 Q 14 69 2 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 14 3 mrad 14 81 2 2 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 23 Q 9 24 2 2 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 12 8 mrad 9 27 2 4 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 0 64 Q 6 92 2 4 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 12 5 mrad 6 93 2 6 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 22 Q 6 88 2 6 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 14 4 mrad 6 89 3 0 GHz 3 dBm Z Q 1 10 6 71 3 0 GHz 3 dBm 0 mrad 13 8 mrad 6 75 Standard 10 cm Airline with Open Averaging 1 Frequency Power Level Measurement Test Result Measurement TAR Uncertainty 1 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 1771Q 8 18 1 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 50 6 mrad 13 12 10 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 7 70 21 20 10 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 5 3 mrad 14 20 100 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 42 Q 8 05 100 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 1 mrad 7 50 200 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 22 Q 6 76 200 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 2 mrad 6 86 Copyright 2009 Agilent Technologies 300 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 16 Q 5 79 300 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 2 6 mrad 5 80 500 MHz 20 dBm Z Q X 0 09 Q 6 19 500 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 3 7 mrad 6 26 600 MHz 20 dBm Z Q X 0 09 Q 5 58 600 MHz 20 dBm 0 mrad 8 7 mrad 5 63 800 MHz 20 dBm Z Q 0 12 Q

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MOVIDAMR IP2023_P  Mise en page 1  Avocent Cyclades-PR4000 Home Theater Server User Manual  Sharp HT-SB300 Specifications    DMX_Splitter IP65_User_man_eng_v1-0  grande brio 35 operating manual v02    Guía de instalación rápida Receptor de AV para teatro en casa NS  Manual - Costco  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file